Sunteți pe pagina 1din 498

Software manual

TruTops Mark

Software manual

TruTops Mark
Original operator's manual

Edition: 02/2010

1434727

Ordering information

Please state title of document, desired language and date of


edition.
TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG
Technische Dokumentation
Ausserfeld
CH-7214 Grsch
Fon: +41 (0) 81/30 76-5 88
Fax: +41 (0) 81/30 76-5 89
Internet: http://www.lasermarking.trumpf.com
E-Mail: service@lasermarking.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical Editorial Department of


TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG
TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG

Table of Contents
Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Introduction to TruTops Mark operation


1.
1.1
1.2
1.3

Laser marking ................................................................ 1-3


Why use a laser marker?................................................. 1-3
Principle ........................................................................... 1-7
Processes ...................................................................... 1-10

2.

The TruTops Mark concept ....................................... 1-11

3.
3.1

Introduction to the manual ......................................... 1-14


Terminology ................................................................... 1-14

Options for user levels and software


modules
1.

Basic cofigurations ex works....................................... 2-3

2.

Default setting for the customer/operator................... 2-4


Set user level .............................................................. 2-5
Enable option at customer ............................................. 2-12

2.1
3.
3.1

3.2
3.3
3.4

3.5

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

Optional settings ......................................................... 2-13


Navigator........................................................................ 2-13
Group field Extra....................................................... 2-14
Group field Material .................................................. 2-14
Group field Process .................................................. 2-15
Group field Content .................................................. 2-16
Group field Matrix ..................................................... 2-17
Display Help (operating sequence) .......................... 2-20
Display laser power (LPM)............................................. 2-21
Calibrate laser power (LPC) .......................................... 2-23
Pilot laser ....................................................................... 2-25
Operating modes ...................................................... 2-26
Activating the pilot laser............................................ 2-27
Matrix generator............................................................. 2-28
Introduction ............................................................... 2-28

Table of Contents

0-5

3.6

Chapter 3

0-6

Binning...................................................................... 2-31
Operation .................................................................. 2-32
Imager............................................................................ 2-45
Import bitmap............................................................ 2-46
Assign laser parameters........................................... 2-48
Optimize grayscale chart .......................................... 2-49
Define marking direction........................................... 2-50
Other settings than standard .................................... 2-52

Marking interface
1.
1.1
1.2

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark ............................ 3-3


Starting............................................................................. 3-3
Exiting .............................................................................. 3-3

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Start screen .................................................................... 3-4


Running a marking program ............................................ 3-5
Loading a marking program............................................. 3-6
Viewing the marking program .......................................... 3-7
Starting the marking program .......................................... 3-7

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Working with the marking interface........................... 3-11


Buttons and function keys.............................................. 3-11
Status area .................................................................... 3-14
Starting the marking program ........................................ 3-20
Menus ............................................................................ 3-23

4.
4.1
4.2

File menu ...................................................................... 3-24


> 1 Open ........................................................................ 3-24
> 2 Exit........................................................................... 3-24

5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Laser menu................................................................... 3-25


> 1 Pilot laser setup ....................................................... 3-25
> 2 Multiple marking ...................................................... 3-26
> 3 Scanner (Autocalibration) ........................................ 3-26
> 4 Reset ....................................................................... 3-27

6.

Module menu................................................................ 3-28

7.
7.1
7.2

Tools menu................................................................... 3-29


> 1 CAD Editor............................................................... 3-29
> 2 Diagnostics tool ....................................................... 3-29

Table of Contents

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

Chapter 4

7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10

> 3 Supply unit simulator ............................................... 3-30


> 4 QuickFlow ................................................................ 3-30
> 5 Error display............................................................. 3-31
> 6 TLV Test Tool .......................................................... 3-32
> 7 MatrixGenerator....................................................... 3-33
> 8 GridGenerator.......................................................... 3-33
> 9 Check laser power................................................... 3-33
> 10 Calibrate laser power............................................. 3-33

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6

Extras menu ................................................................. 3-34


> 1 Change user level.................................................... 3-35
> 26 Change status displays ....................................... 3-36
> 7 Configuration ........................................................... 3-36
> 8 Registry backup ....................................................... 3-46
> 9 Delete current VCT files .......................................... 3-46
> 10 Delete all VCT files ................................................ 3-47

9.
9.1
9.2

Workstation menu ....................................................... 3-48


> 1 Referencing ............................................................. 3-48
> 2 Configuration ........................................................... 3-48

10.
10.1
10.2

Help menu .................................................................... 3-50


> 1 TruTops Mark......................................................... 3-50
> 2 Info........................................................................... 3-50

11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7

Modules ........................................................................ 3-51


Control with external data communication..................... 3-51
Control with workstation................................................. 3-52
Control with digital interface........................................... 3-53
QuickFlow control .......................................................... 3-53
Control with serial interface ........................................... 3-53
Control with TCP/IP interface ........................................ 3-54
Control with COM interface............................................ 3-54

CAD
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

CAD ................................................................................. 4-5


Introduction ...................................................................... 4-5
Marking program.............................................................. 4-6
Starting CAD.................................................................... 4-6
User interface of CAD...................................................... 4-7
User interface of CAD with Multihead............................ 4-13

Table of Contents

0-7

0-8

2.
2.1
2.2

Working with CAD ....................................................... 4-14


Drawing an object .......................................................... 4-14
Change objects.............................................................. 4-17

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10

File menu ...................................................................... 4-22


> New............................................................................. 4-22
> Open ........................................................................... 4-22
> Close........................................................................... 4-23
> Save............................................................................ 4-23
> Print ............................................................................ 4-23
> Print preview ............................................................... 4-24
> Printer setup ............................................................... 4-25
> Print section ................................................................ 4-25
> Send ........................................................................... 4-27
> Exit.............................................................................. 4-27

4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12

Edit menu ..................................................................... 4-28


> Undo ........................................................................... 4-28
> Repeat ........................................................................ 4-29
> Cut .............................................................................. 4-29
> Copy ........................................................................... 4-29
> Paste........................................................................... 4-29
> Delete ......................................................................... 4-29
> Modify ......................................................................... 4-30
> Properties ................................................................... 4-42
> Import file .................................................................... 4-45
> Export DXF/DWG ....................................................... 4-48
> Remove double line.................................................... 4-49
> Create polyline............................................................ 4-49

5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9

View menu .................................................................... 4-50


> Status bar ................................................................... 4-50
> Tool bars..................................................................... 4-51
> Entire page ................................................................. 4-54
> Entire drawing............................................................. 4-54
> Selection ..................................................................... 4-54
> Last view..................................................................... 4-54
> Named sections .......................................................... 4-55
> Refresh ....................................................................... 4-56
> Only thin lines ............................................................. 4-56

6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

Draw menu ................................................................... 4-57


> Line ............................................................................. 4-60
> Rectangle.................................................................... 4-64
> Circle........................................................................... 4-66
> Arc of a circle .............................................................. 4-69

Table of Contents

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13

> Polyline ....................................................................... 4-73


> Ellipse ......................................................................... 4-76
> Arc of an ellipse .......................................................... 4-77
> Bitmap......................................................................... 4-78
> Dimensioning .............................................................. 4-81
> Hatching...................................................................... 4-83
> Point............................................................................ 4-83
> Tools ........................................................................... 4-84
> Data object.................................................................. 4-88

7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16

Laser menu................................................................. 4-105


> Print project............................................................... 4-106
> Export project data as XML file................................. 4-108
> Laser parameters...................................................... 4-108
> Marking field ............................................................. 4-136
> Sort ........................................................................... 4-148
> Generate object matrix ............................................. 4-151
> Variables................................................................... 4-153
> Hatch styles .............................................................. 4-158
> Font Editor ................................................................ 4-159
> Sort segments........................................................... 4-160
> Project data............................................................... 4-161
> Pilot laser on/off ........................................................ 4-162
> Marking ..................................................................... 4-162
> Navigator .................................................................. 4-163
> Focus test ................................................................. 4-163
> Slow hatch as area ................................................... 4-164

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

Font Editor.................................................................. 4-165


File menu ..................................................................... 4-168
Edit menu..................................................................... 4-181
View menu ................................................................... 4-182
Font menu.................................................................... 4-187
Help.............................................................................. 4-201

9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

Tools menu................................................................. 4-201


> Layers ....................................................................... 4-202
> Measurement type .................................................... 4-205
> Colors ....................................................................... 4-209
> Grid ........................................................................... 4-210
> Grid active................................................................. 4-212
> Orthogonal mode ...................................................... 4-212
> Jump mode ............................................................... 4-213
> Jump to points of intersection................................... 4-213
> Options ..................................................................... 4-214

Table of Contents

0-9

Chapter 5

0-10

10.

Window menu ............................................................ 4-230

11.
11.1
11.2

Menu ? (Help) ............................................................. 4-230


> Index ......................................................................... 4-230
> Copyright .................................................................. 4-230

Examples, exercises
1.

Introduction.................................................................... 5-3

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

Example Compass...................................................... 5-4


Creating a graphic ........................................................... 5-5
Administrate and allocate laser parameters .................. 5-26
Optimize marking program ............................................ 5-31
Optimize graphic............................................................ 5-32
Optimize marking sequence .......................................... 5-32
Optimize laser parameters............................................. 5-34

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Rating plate example................................................... 5-38


Inserting the TRUMPF logo and lettering ...................... 5-44
Define and position variables ........................................ 5-48
Sorting interactively ....................................................... 5-53
Set laser parameters ..................................................... 5-55

4.
4.1

Target example ............................................................ 5-63


Define hatching style ..................................................... 5-67

5.
5.1

CE mark example......................................................... 5-70


"Trim (cut)" tool .............................................................. 5-74

6.
6.1
6.2

Example bitmap ........................................................... 5-77


Importing bitmap ............................................................ 5-78
Setting laser parameter ................................................. 5-81

7.
7.1
7.2

Import external file formats ........................................ 5-82


Import PCR files............................................................. 5-82
Import CAD files............................................................. 5-83

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3

Determining laser parameters.................................... 5-84


Determining laser parameters for plastic....................... 5-84
Determining laser parameters for annealing metals...... 5-86
Determining laser parameters for engraving metals ..... 5-88

Table of Contents

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

Sequential programs
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Automatic marking ........................................................ 6-3


Start sequential program ................................................. 6-4
Loading a sequential program ......................................... 6-6
Change sequential program ............................................ 6-7
Create a new sequential program ................................... 6-8
Accept values .................................................................. 6-9
Save sequential program............................................... 6-10
Exit editor ....................................................................... 6-12
Context menu ................................................................ 6-13
Setup.............................................................................. 6-14

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Commands in the editor menu................................... 6-17


General commands ....................................................... 6-18
> Axis commands .......................................................... 6-20
> Axis commands inching operation......................... 6-22
> Mark commands ......................................................... 6-23
> System commands ..................................................... 6-26

3.

Examples for sequential programs............................ 6-31

Installing TruTops Mark


1.
1.1
1.2

Introduction.................................................................... 7-3
System requirements....................................................... 7-3
Contents of the data medium........................................... 7-3

2.

Installation...................................................................... 7-4

Index

Table of Contents

0-11

0-12

Table of Contents

SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010

Chapter 1

Introduction to TruTops
Mark operation

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

1.
1.1
1.2
1.3

Laser marking ................................................................ 1-3


Why use a laser marker?................................................. 1-3
Principle ........................................................................... 1-7
Processes ...................................................................... 1-10

2.

The TruTops Mark concept ....................................... 1-11

3.
3.1

Introduction to the manual ......................................... 1-14


Terminology ................................................................... 1-14

Laser marking

1-1

1-2

Laser marking

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

1.

Laser marking

1.1

Why use a laser marker?

Marking of industrial goods with a laser has gained in significance


considerably in recent years.
The reasons are:

High degree of process flexibility

Simplified operation due to further development of the software

Inexpensive marking systems

Laser marking has a number of advantages in comparison to


conventional methods such as stamping, punching, mechanical
engraving, etching or pad printing which include:

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Non-contacting processing - no tool wear

Minimum effect on the material

Wide range of materials can be processed

No preparation or reworking necessary

High marking quality and reproducibility

Any marking geometry possible

High degree of flexibility

Application of very fine marking (to 0.03 mm) is possible

High marking speed

Simple integration into fully automatic manufacturing processes

Laser marking

1-3

Industrial goods are marked for different reasons. Various


applications are, for example:

Workpiece or specific device marking

Marking to ensure continuous traceability (product liability).

Marking to prevent imitation (corporate logos)

Color and design-related identification

Grains and marking lines for downstream manufacturing


processes

Why mark?

Laser-marked rating plate

1-4

Laser marking

Fig. 1-1

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Marking for product specification

Laser-marked pressure cells

Marking for workpiece identification

Laser-marked data matrix code on the workpiece

Demands on industrial
marking

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Fig. 1-2

Fig. 1-3

Industrially applied marks and labels must


meet the following requirements:
Permanent marking

Easily recognizable lettering

High degree of flexibility with regard to content and form

Minimum affect on material

Inexpensive

"Online integration" possible, e.g. direct transmission


of data to the workpiece

Laser marking

1-5

Laser-marked circuit breaker

1-6

Laser marking

Fig. 1-4

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

1.2

Principle

Laser light is distinguished by a characteristic wavelength for the


respective laser type and a high power density. The laser beam is
focused on the material for marking.
The interaction with the surface results in a change in the material
for example discoloring or material removal. The exact effect on
the material depends mainly on the wavelength of the laser and
from the interaction time of the laser beam with the material (pulse
duration).
How does marking occur?

The interaction of the laser light with the material depends on the
absorption behaviour of the processed material at the selected
wavelength of the laser, the heat conductivity of the material and
the set processing parameters (e.g.: laser power, laser speed and
the pulse repetition frequency).
There are five different marking methods:

Engraving

Engraving

Annealing

Material removal

Change in color and bleaching

Foaming

Metal, ceramics and several plastics can be engraved with the


laser. The power density of the laser beam is so high that the
material evaporates partly during processing. An itself colorless
indentation results in the material the engraving. Oxides
sometimes form in the engraving, the color of which make the mark
even clearer.

Marking by engraving

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Laser marking

Fig. 1-5

1-7

Annealing

Certain types of steel and titan can be marked by annealing. The


material is locally heated to just below its melting point. As a result
very thin oxide layers form on the surface and with these the
annealing colors. Annealed colors are stable at temperatures of up
to approximately 200C.

Marking by annealing

Material removal

Coated materials can be marked by removing the top layer with the
laser. Example: Anodized aluminum, painted materials or laser
marking film.

Marking by material removal

Change in color and


bleaching

Fig. 1-7

This process is mainly used for plastics. Due to the energy of the
laser beam, the structure of individual molecules or additives, for
example color pigments, is either directly changed or destroyed.
The material and laser wavelength must be optimally coordinated
to this purpose. A change in color or bleaching of the material is
then visible on the treated areas. The surface of the material
remains almost undamaged.

Marking by change in color and bleaching

1-8

Fig. 1-6

Laser marking

Fig. 1-8

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Foaming

Foaming is only possible with certain plastics. The laser beam


makes the plastic melt locally. Small gas bubbles then form which
are encapsulated when the material cools. In contrast to engraving
a "raised" inscription is then formed. The light falling on the treated
areas is reflected diffusely as a result they appear to be lighter.

Marking by foaming

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Laser marking

Fig. 1-9

1-9

1.3

Processes

TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems work according to the vector


marking process the image is made up of a number of lines
("vectors").

4
1
4

1 Marking program

4 Deflection mirror

2 Control unit

5 Lens

3 Laser head

6 Marking field

Configuration of a laser marking system

Laser and beam direction

Fig. 1-10

The laser head produces the laser beam which is required for the
marking process. The beam is directed with the deflection mirrors
and lenses to where the mark is to be made on the surface of the
workpiece.
The control unit regulates and monitors all processes and is an
interface between the operator and the marking system. The
TruTops Mark control program permits an efficient man-machine
dialog.
The main features of TruTops Mark are:

1-10

Functions for creating texts

CAD interfaces for reading in existing graphic files e.g. logos


or special characters

Integration of online measuring data

Functions for the generation of barcodes, variables and serial


numbers

Option for the integration of manufacturing processes,


communication with manufacturing computers

Laser marking

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

The TruTops Mark concept

2.

11

22
10

12

20
21

13
14

TruTops Mark

10 Control software
11 Interfaces
12 Marking on the fly (MOF)
13 QuickFlow for sequential programming
14 Diagnostics tool
20 Graphic data input (CAD Editor)
21 Laser parameter administration
22 Navigator
Fig. 1-11

The control software TruTops Mark has an intuitive user interface.


Via this user interface it is possible to control:

Interfaces

Marking on the fly (MOF)

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Interfaces
Simple Marking on the fly
QuickFlow for sequential programming
Diagnostics tool
CAD Editor
Laser parameter administration
Navigator

TruTops Mark is based on Windows and is provided in several


languages.
Variable production data can be integrated in a predefined marking
program via the integrated interface. TruTops Mark offers a variety
of possibilities for the control-side integration of the laser marking
system in existing plants. A "COM Inprocess Server" provides the
interface for software developed and supplied by the customer.
Within continuous production processes, workpieces can be
marked without stopping the assembly line. MOF overlays the
movement of the object to be marked with the movement of the
laser beam to make sure the marking is not distorted. The
workpiece transport is continually measured via encoder signals to
guarantee a constant marking quality during start-up and braking
procedures.

The TruTops Mark concept

1-11

Sequential programming

The sequential program can control all machine functions in


connection with a TruMark Station. The sequential programs can
be written or changed via the editing mode.

QuickFlow

The visual software program "QuickFlow" has been developed to


simplify the generation of sequential programs. With a simple "Pick
and Drop" it is possible to generate programs to control the
complete marking cycle from start to finish.

Service via the diagnostics


tool

You would like to reduce your downtimes to a minimum?


In that case you need the help of our service team. Via telepresence and the public communication network it is possible to
carry out a telediagnosis. Call up the diagnostics tool. The
diagnostics tool visualizes and analyzes the recorded
measurement readings by means of its sensors. It indicates a
complete list of monitoring and error messages, along with the
current status information and the operating values of the laser
marking system during the process.

User interfaces

When switching the laser marking system on, TruTops Mark is


automatically started via the control computer.
TruTops Mark is a software specifically developed for marking
processes. Depending on the presetting, the user interface for
laser marking systems is started without a module preselection
(left) or a TruMark Station (right).

Fig. 1-12

User interfaces

TruTops Mark supports the operating personnel in the user levels


"Customer" or "Operator", serving the purpose of generating
marking and sequential programs.
Unlike the marking programs, sequential programs can be
constructed in a complex manner with control sequences to control
the procedures of whole processes.

1-12

The TruTops Mark concept

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

To be able to start working with the CAD, click on the "CAD" button
or the <F10> function key.

The CAD Editor


The components of the CAD
Editor

serves to generate or change marking programs.


are designed for the operation.
The marking preview shows the section which is going to be
marked in a further step on a workpiece.

1
2

Menu bar

Icon bars

Ruler bars

Drawing field / marking area

Status line

Components of the CAD Editor

Fig. 1-13

The CAD Editor offers all the usual functions for the drawing and
arranging of graphic objects a complete CAD program contains.
With the CAD Editor you can create drawings which are converted
with the marking module into marking programs and then executed
by the laser marking system.
Both, simple geometry such as squares, circles and texts as well
as complex geometry with several drawing elements can be
created. It is also possible to generate special marks such as serial
numbers, barcodes etc.

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

The TruTops Mark concept

1-13

With corresponding converters, CAD drawings or pixel files can be


imported which can be varied as required. The laser parameters
are also defined in the CAD Editor.
Laser parameter
administration

All existing laser parameters are combined in a separate dialog,


thematically devided and clearly represented. Since the laser
parameters are organized in a database, the parameters optimized
for special materials can be used again and again.

Navigator option

The navigator option is provided to enable you as a customer to


promptly find, adjust, and optimize the appropriate laser
parameters for your marking task. More detailed information is
given in Chapter 2.

3.

Introduction to the manual

This manual is provided to assist you in becoming familiar with


TruTops Mark programming and its options quickly and simply.
The manual serves as supplementary documentation to software
training and also as a reference.
The manual is also provided for the operating personnel working
with the OEM laser marking systems/laser units.
It is advantageous for using the manual if certain terms are
explained in advance.

3.1

1-14

Terminology

Select

Functions from the main menu bar, screen menus and buttons are
selected.

Click

Position the mouse pointer and click the left-hand mouse button
once.

Marking program

Drawings and texts which are to be marked on the workpiece are


created with the CAD Editor and saved in a marking program. The
program contains additional graphic data for controlling the
scanner head of the laser marking system as well as the necessary
laser parameters.

Sequential program

The sequential program runs on the control computer of the laser


marking system, controls the entire sequence of a marking
operation and also the functions of the machine and exchanges
data with other Windows applications and external systems or
control units.

Marking field

The marking field is the area in which marking can be performed


by the laser. The size of the marking field depends on the machine
and is adjusted in the marking interface in accordance with the
selected optics.

Introduction to the manual

SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010

Chapter 2

Options for user levels and


software modules
1.

Basic cofigurations ex works....................................... 2-3

2.

Default setting for the customer/operator................... 2-4


Set user level .............................................................. 2-5
Enable option at customer ............................................. 2-12

2.1
3.
3.1

3.2
3.3
3.4

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings ......................................................... 2-13


Navigator........................................................................ 2-13
Group field Extra....................................................... 2-14
Group field Material .................................................. 2-14
Group field Process .................................................. 2-15
Group field Content .................................................. 2-16
Group field Matrix ..................................................... 2-17
Display Help (operating sequence) .......................... 2-20
Display laser power (LPM)............................................. 2-21
Calibrate laser power (LPC) .......................................... 2-23
Pilot laser ....................................................................... 2-25
Operating modes ...................................................... 2-26
Activating the pilot laser............................................ 2-27

Basic cofigurations ex works

2-1

3.5

3.6

2-2

Basic cofigurations ex works

Matrix generator............................................................. 2-28


Introduction ............................................................... 2-28
Binning...................................................................... 2-31
Operation .................................................................. 2-32
Imager............................................................................ 2-45
Import bitmap............................................................ 2-46
Assign laser parameters........................................... 2-48
Optimize grayscale chart .......................................... 2-49
Define marking direction........................................... 2-50
Other settings than standard .................................... 2-52

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

1.

Basic cofigurations ex works

Laser marking systems


Several basic configurations are available depending on the laser
marking system.
OEM Series
TruMark Series 3000

Remark
Compact solid-state laser or
Air-cooled solid laser

TruMark Series 5000

Quick compact fiber laser

TruMark Series 6000

Water-cooled high-performance solidstate laser

Laser units
Code

Name

TMS 1000

TruMark Station 1000

TMS 5000

TruMark Station 5000

TMS 5000 R

TruMark Station 5000 Rotary table

TMS 7000

TruMark Station 7000

Simulation mode
With the office PC it is possible to operate TruTops Mark in the
simulation mode. So you can intuitively become aquainted with the
settings of the laser marking systems and laser units. The settings
for the software and hardware options are unavailable.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Basic cofigurations ex works

2-3

2.

Default setting for the


customer/operator

Hardware and software options can be preset specifically,


depending on whether the laser marking system is operated on its
own or in combination with a laser unit.
2 user levels are provided:
Customer
Operator
The user level "Customer" is preconfigured ex works as the default
setting, that is the user management is not activated in the delivery
status.
The customer has access to all functions of the marking surface
described in this documentation.
This offers you, as "Customer", the possibility to set up the
"Operator" user level according to your own ideas.
The "Customer" can enable or disable various functions by
activating the user management.
If you click the checkbox "Activate" in the user management, the
user management is switched on. To activate the rights of the
operator, click the checkboxes in the input area "Settings for the
operator" under the following subitems:
Login mode
Tools (Menu 4 Tools)
File
Module
Extras
Laser control
Configuration

2-4

Default setting for the customer/operator

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Set user level


Extras > Configuration > Card User management
The TruTops Mark software starts with the user level: "Customer"
without password prompt and with all rights of the customer.
Settings

User management dialog window

Fig. 2-1

Click the "Activate" checkbox. This activates the user management


with the "Settings for the operator" in the dialog shown above.
Having activated the user management, the system reacts as
follows:
The additional "Operator" level is now available.
The menu functions enabled on the "Operator" level can be
configured individually.
On the "Customer" user level the password prompt is active. It
cannot be deactivated.
On the "Operator" level the password prompt is active.
It can be deactivated.
The default password for "Customer" is: customer
The default password for "Operator" is: worker

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Default setting for the customer/operator

2-5

Password for the customer

Password: customer
PW_setup_customer

Fig. 2-2

Password for the operator

Password: worker
PW_setup operator

2-6

Default setting for the customer/operator

Fig. 2-3

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

The following descriptions refer to the checkboxes that have to be


clicked.

User management_1

Fig. 2-4

Login mode

"Necessary to log in" activated


There is no password prompt
"Logging" activated
The login as operator or customer is recorded

File

Activate "Open marking file"


The operator is also permitted to load a marking file
Activate "Load sequential program"
The operator is also permitted to load a marking file

Module

Tools

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Activate "Selection and start"


The operator is permitted to select and start modules 3-9
Activate "Access to the function key panel"
The operator is permitted to operate the function key bar
Activate "Access to the configuration"
The operator is permitted to select the configurationen
"Selection and start"
The operator is permitted to select and start tools 1-6.

Default setting for the customer/operator

2-7

User management 2

Fig. 2-5

Extras

Activate "Selection of status views"


The operator is permitted to select status views 2-6:
I/O status
Marking preview
Laser parameter
Error history
RTC status
Activate "Perform registry backups "
The operator is permitted to carry out a registry backup
Activate "Delete VCT files"
The operator is permitted to delete the current VCT file and/or all
VCT files
Activate "Access to the function of status view"
The operator has access to the functions of the status display.

2-8

Default setting for the customer/operator

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Laser control

Activate "Laser on/off"


The operator is permitted to switch the laser on and off via the
"Laser_F2" button
Activate "Shutter open/close"
The operator is permitted to open or close the shutter via the
"Shutter_F3" botton
Activate "Pilot laser on/off"
The operator is permitted to switch the pilot laser on and off via
the"Pilot laser_F5" button
Activate "Laser reset"
The operator is permitted to shut down the laser via the"Reset_F4"
button
Activate "Start and cancel marking processes"
The operator is permitted to start and cancel the marking
procedure via the "Marking file_F11" button.
Activate "Scanner calibriation"
Tip
Scanner calibration can only be activated if the corresponding
hardware is provided.
The operator can carry out an automatic scanner calibration via
"2 Laser > 3 Scanner >1 Set reference values" and
"2 Laser > 3 Scanner > 2 Calibriation".

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Default setting for the customer/operator

2-9

User management 3

Configuration

Fig. 2-6

Activate "Pilot laser"


The operator is permitted to configure the pilot laser in the laser
menu via the submenu "Pilot laser configuration"
Activate "Multiple marking"
The operator is permitted to enter the number of markings in the
laser menu via the submenu "Multiple marking".
Activate "Machine"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Machine" menu
Activate "GUI"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "GUI" menu
Activate "Directories"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" >"Directories" menu

2-10

Default setting for the customer/operator

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Activate "Digital interface"


The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Digital interace" menu
Activate "Miscellaneous"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Miscellaneous" menu
Activate "Marking on the fly"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Marking on the fly" menu
Activate "Options"
The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the
Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Options" menu

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Default setting for the customer/operator

2-11

2.1

Enable option at customer

To enable an option purchase the activation code from the sales


department. This activation code is allocated via the equipment
number. The activation code consists of 16 alphanumeric digits.
Entry
in
TruTops
Mark
is
via
the
menu
path
Extras > Configuration > Options.

Enabled options

Fig. 2-7

In the group field "Enabled options" select the requested option by


clicking the corresponding checkbox.
When the box has been checked, 4 free fields open on the right for
entering the activation code. Enter the activation code and confirm
with "OK". After the restart of TruTops Mark the option is available.

2-12

Default setting for the customer/operator

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

3.

Optional settings

Enabling ex works or at customer (refer to 2.1).

3.1

Navigator

The navigator helps the operator to promptly find, adjust, and


optimize the appropriate laser parameters for the marking task.
The navigator can be started in 2 ways.
Click the "Navigator" button in the tools bar of the CAD Editor
or
select the "Navigator" function from the "Laser" menu.
The "Navigator" dialog window opens.
Set the "Navigator" dialog window by selecting the "Help"
checkbox in the group field "Extra", according to the figure shown
below. A help field opens displaying the next steps. TRUMPF
recommends this procedure.
The navigator is operated via 5 group fields and 6 buttons.

"Navigator" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

Fig. 2-8

2-13

Group field Extra


Both checkboxes can be selected at the same time.
Select "Additional information"
The detailed axial marking with pulse frequency, speed, etc. is
displayed.
Select "Help"
The next steps for the operator are displayed in the help field.

Group field Material


It is possible to select the marking material.
One or several processes are assigned to each material. Select
the material and the requested process.
Note
Take notice of the help field with the display of the next step.
Material
Ceramic
Synthetic
Metal

2-14

Optional settings

Group field Process


Engraving
Foaming or carbonisation
Annealing, Deep engraving (Quality),
Deep engraving (Speed), White
engraving, Black engraving, Ablation

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Group field Process


The processes which can be used change their color from grey to
black. The option fields highlighted in white can be selected. If
several options are offered you have to decide on an option.
Note
Take notice of the help field with the display of the next step.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Material ceramic

Fig. 2-9

Optional settings

2-15

Group field Content


You can select the options "Area" or "Line/Text".
If you want to assign a hatching to an area, select the "Area"
option. It is not possible to assign a hatching to a line. If you want
to create a text, select the "Line/Text" option.
Select the "Area" option
Take notice of the "Help" group field with the display of the next
step.
Preview button
Click the Preview button. The next steps (1-6) are displayed in the
help field. The following figure appears:

Preview Ceramic dialog window

2-16

Optional settings

Fig. 2-10

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Group field Matrix


Optimal field: Enter the coordinates of your best result for your
"Optimal field" (e.g.: A0).
Selection of the lines is via the letters (e.g.: A-F); the columns are
selected via the digits (e.g.: 0-4).
By clicking your Optimal field (e.g.: A0) with the mouse, it will be
entered in the "Matrix" group field at "Optimal field".

Preview Ceramic dialog window

Fig. 2-11

Example: Optimal field: Enter A0


Result of the 6th step

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-17

Preview button
After pressing the "Preview" button, the adequate matrix appears
in the main window. The matrix can be enlarged or reduced (zoom
in/zoom out), depending on the space available on the material to
be marked.

Fig. 2-12

Example:
The "Line/Text" option is activated in the "Content" group field, and
the "Additional information" checkbox is activated in the "Extra"
group field.

2-18

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

When is it reasonale to use the "Zoom"?


After you have carried out test markings and checked your
material, it is time to identify the best parameter set by means of
the zoom. Then the parameter set must tbe saved to carry out the
marking.
Zoom button
In addition it is possible to display a certain area more precisely
(refer to Fig. 2-13). Example: the speeds between 25 and
800 mm/s (left) are to be be changed to 412 to 606 mm/s (right).
This can be achieved by selecting these objects with the mouse
and press the "Zoom" button. A new matrix of the same size is
displayed, showing the speeds between 412 und 606 mm/s. This
results in a reduced step size.

Fig. 2-13

Pilot laser button


Press the "Pilot laser on" button. The pilot laser is activated. So the
material can be correctly positioned. Then press the "Pilot laser"
button once more. The pilot laser is switched off.
Marking button
Having determined the area to be marked by means of the pilot
laser, press the "Marking" button.
OK button
The parameters are adopted in the initial or starting file of the CAD.
Cancel button
The dialog is closed, followed by a reset to the initial or starting file
of the CAD.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-19

Fig. 2-14

Having ended the navigator, the selected laser parameter (test01)


has been adopted in the CAD. This parameter can be assigned to
an object via the drop-down combination field, or executed further
via the "Global and internal parameters" button, if, e.g., color,
output, or Z offset values are to be changed. If an area has been
marked with the mouse, the used hatching is also adopted. It can,
as usual, be called up via "Fill" or "Laser > Hatch styles".

Display Help (operating sequence)


The next steps of the workflow are displayed.

2-20

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

3.2
Prerequisite

Display laser power (LPM)

The laser shutter must be closed and all TruTops Mark inputs and
outputs must be deactivated.
Start the measuring cycle directly via menu: "4 Tools > 9 LPM"

Fig. 2-15

The following dialog window opens and the measurement starts


when you press "F2 Start".

Fig. 2-16

The measurement will take approx. 3 minutes. Afterwards you are


requested to confirm or change the name of the log file. The dialog
window is closed by pressing "F9 Exit" .
The measured value is saved in this log file (*.txt) and can be
redout from there.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-21

Fig. 2-17

The log file content consists of the following information:


Date in the international format: DD.MM.YYYY
Behind it the time in the international format: HH:MM:SS
Measuring time in (s) seconds
Rated value of the laser power in (W)
fqs: Frequency (Hz)
tqs: Pulse duration (us)

Fig. 2-18

2-22

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

3.3

Calibrate laser power (LPC)

During calibration the laser power is set to an optimum value. This


is done by adjusting the pump module power in several steps. After
each step the laser power is checked until it has reached the
admissible range. This process is executed after you have pressed
the "Start F2" button.
Cause

The laser power has to be calibrated when:


The laser power decreases
Pump modules have been replaced
The marking results no longer correspond to the original
image, even though no parameter has been changed
The cover slide has been cleaned

Laser marking system TruMark 6330 cannot be calibrated!


Prerequisite To guarantee that cooler and beaming source are in the thermally
steady state, LPC may only be started if the conditions

Supply unit on

Laser on
have at least met the times given in the table below. Since "Laser
on" can be executed during the warm-up period of the supply unit
(SU), the minimum waiting times given in column 3 have to be
complied with.
Exception

Time periods before calibration is started.


Laser
Via TruTops
marking
Mark-/TruDiag
SU on [min]
system
button Laser on
(LMS)
[min]

Start LPC
possible after
[min] at the
earliest

TM 3010

20

10

20

TM 3020

20

10

20

TM 3130

20

10

20

TM 3230

40

10

40

TM 5020

-----

TM 6020

20

20

40

TM 6030

20

20

40

TM 6130

20

20

40

TM 6140

20

20

40

TM 6230

40

20

60

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Calibriation can take several minutes.

Optional settings

2-23

Start calibration process directly via the "4 Tools >10 LPC" menu

Fig. 2-19

Parameter

Values

Status

Display of the status texts in English

Display of laser power during a certain time

6.

Tool bar
Fig. 2-20

Depending on the laser marking system, parameters may also be


hidden. The dialog window is closed by pressing "F9".

2-24

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

3.4

Pilot laser

The pilot laser emits low-power red light through the laser optics.
Marking operations are simulated with the pilot laser for setting-up
purposes before the actual marking.
It serves as:
a setting-up aid to position workpieces on the marking field of
the laser marking system,
an aid to test marking operations.
There is a slight difference between the beam of the pilot laser and
the actual marking laser due to the different wavelengths, these
are automatically corrected in TruTops Mark.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-25

Operating modes
The pilot laser can be used in two different operating modes:
Operating mode 1: "Rectangle"
Operating mode 2: "Outline"
Proceed as follows:

In the laser menu activate the "Pilot laser setup" function.


The "Pilot laser setup" dialog window appears on the screen.

Pilot laser setup

"Pilot laser setup" dialog window

Fig. 2-21

Click the checkbox in front of "Rectangle".

Activate the box "Endless marking".


A tick then appears in the box. As a result the pilot laser marks
when marking is started later until the operation is terminated
with <Reset> or by pressing <F4> ("Pilot laser off") by the
customer/operator.

When using a TruMark Station and without segmentation,


activate the box "Restart after marking".
A tick then appears in the box. As a result the pilot laser will
restart automatically after the marking process.

Click the OK button.


The dialog box is then closed.

The operating mode has then been selected.

2-26

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Note
If the box "Endless marking" is not activated, the simulation is
terminated after one operation.
Rectangle operating mode
If the "Rectangle" operating mode is selected, the pilot laser
describes a rectangle or square on the marking field. The maximum expansion of the drawing in the X and Y directions is shown
with this external frame.
Outline operating mode
In this mode the pilot laser replicates the graphic of the marking file
completely, i.e. all individual outlines are displayed in the programmed sequence.

Activating the pilot laser


When the operating mode has been selected you can activate the
pilot laser.

Switching the pilot laser off

Click the "F5 Pilot laser" button or press <Shift> + <F5> at the
same time.

In connection with a TruMark Station click the "F5 Pilot laser


on" button or press the function key <F4>.

In the readiness display area of the marking interface the


indicator lights up in light green to the left of "Pilot laser
on".

The shutter of the working laser is automatically closed.


Laser light with 1064 nm, 532 nm or 355 nm cannot be
emitted.

Click the "F12 Marking" button or press the <F12> function


key.

Click the F4 button on the start screen of the TruTops Mark


program or press the <F4> function key or the key combination
<Ctrl or Strg key + C>.

The indicator next to "Pilot laser off" goes out.

The pilot laser corresponds to laser class 2!


Although this is low intensity it can still damage your eyes.

Never look directly into a beam.

WARNING

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-27

3.5

Matrix generator

Introduction
The matrix generator supports the simple generation and
maintenance of marking files for a double-head system.
All required files are maintained in an access database. The
database structure contains the following tables:

Fig. 2-22

2-28

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

SemiConJob

This is the starting table. The selection of a chips is done via


JobCode.
Field name

Content

jobId

Definite ID (is automatically


allocated)

jobCode

Job code

jobVLFFilename

Complete file name including


directory for a marking file (*VLF)
with the marking content.

jobBinningFilename

Complete file name including


directory with the binning marking file
(*VLF) with all laser parameters
required.

jobMatrixFilename

Complete file name including


directory with the newly generated
marking file (*VLF) with the matrix
layout on all chips.

jobCreate

Date/time of the first creation.

jobUpdate

Date/time of the last change.


Tab. 2-1

BaseStripGroupRows

This table contains the distances between the groups in Y direction


Field name

Content

bsrId

Definite ID (is automatically


allocated)

jobId

Reference on related job

bsrDistance

Distance in mm
Tab. 2-2

BaseStripGroupColumns

This table contains the distances between the groups in X direction


Field name

Content

bsrId

Definite ID (is automatically


allocated)

jobId

Reference on related job

bscDistance

Distance in mm
Tab. 2-3

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-29

BasStripProperties

This table contains the definition for the matrix.


Field name

Content

bspId

Definite ID (is automatically


allocated)

bspStepX

Step size per field in X direction


in mm

bspStepY

Step size per field in Y direction


in mm

bspLowerLeftX

Lower left corner in X direction of the


1st field in mm

bspLowerLeftY

Lower left corner in Y direction of the


1st field in mm

bspColumns

Number of columns

bspColumnDistance

Column distance

bspRows

Number of rows

bspRowsDistance

Row distance

bspGroupColumns

Groups of columns

bspGroupDistanceColumns

Number of groups in X direction

bspGroupRows

Groups of rows

bspGroupDistanceRows

Number of groups in Y direction

bspChipX

Chip dimension in X direction in mm

bspChipY

Chip dimension in Y direction in mm

bspChipZ

Chip dimension in Z direction in mm

bspChipRotate

Chip dimension in rotary direction in


mm

jobId

Reference on related job

bspX

Still unused

bspY

Still unused

bspZ

Still unused

bspUpperRightForStrip

Reference point top right (center of


group)

bspRelativeShiftX

Relative distance to X

bspRelativeShiftY

Relative distance to Y

bspXOffsetHeadA

Head A: set x value

bspYOffsetHeadA

Head A: set y value

bspAngleHeadA

Head A: set angle specification

bspXOffsetHeadB

Head B: set x value

bspYOffsetHeadB

Head B: set y value

bspAngleHeadB

Head B: set angle specification


Tab. 2-4

2-30

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Chip

This table contains the definitions for the chip.


Field name

Content

chId

Definite ID (is automatically


allocated)

jobId

Reference on related job

chrow

Row

chColumn

Column

chPosition

Rotation angle of a chip (0; 90; 180;


270 degrees)

chXOffset

Individual offset to chip position in X


direction on head A

chYOffset

Individual offset to chip position in Y


direction on head A

chMarkingSW

True = Mark;
False = do not mark

chBinning

Information on quality are then


assigned to the respective chip via
the "Quality" variable.
Tab. 2-5

Binning
In the semiconductor industry it is demanded that certain chips
must not be marked retroactively (dynamic) because on the basis
of a quality process, individual chips have been designated as
unusable.
This quality process is called "Binning"; it assigns the quality
characteristics to each chip.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-31

Operation
The matrix generator supports the simple generation and
maintenance of marking files for a double-head system.
Start the matrix generator directly via:
"4 Tools > 7 MatrixGenerator"

Fig. 2-23

2-32

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

After starting the matrix generator, the following display appears:

1
2
3

5.1

5.2
1

Menu bar

Tool bar (6 tools are used)

Cards

Input field

Status bar

5.1

Display designation

5.2

Display marking file

5.3

Display of row and column

Matrix generator application

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

5.3

Fig. 2-24

Optional settings

2-33

Menu bar
Exit
The matrix generator can be closed via:
menu "1 File> 1 Exit" or
key combination <Strg+F4>
Start
It is possible to generate a "Job" as a XML file and store a marking
file in the access database via "2 Save".

Help
The following is displayed:
product name
version
copyright

Tool bar
Generate XML file
for generation of matrix files and binning files
Save
for data transfer to the access database
Zoom in
Zoom in in the preview

Zoom out
Zoom out in the preview

Press left arrow


In the preview the entire matrix is displayed in gray. After pressing
the left arrow, the selected area is displayed in yellow and it is
possible to continue operation.
Press right arrow
Select individual areas which are not meant to belong to the yellow
area and mark with the "Right arrow".

2-34

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Cards
Administration is operated with the group fields:
Matrix
Matrix description
Marking field/Matrix is operated with the group fields:
Matrix configuration
Marking field
Shift
Head A
Head B
Preview is operated with:
Offset X (pasting position X)
Offset Y (pasting position Y)
Angle (0, 90, 180, 270 degrees)
Classification
Display or hide the marking preview

Input field
White fields where no input has been made yet show a little blue
triangle on the left upper corner of the input field. The entered text
is displayed in bold type.
Fields which are currently handled change the color from white to
yellow. As soon as the input is finished, the background color
changes back again to white.

If an invalid value has been entered, the background color changes


to red.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-35

Card Administration
Recommended procedure

Select an existing matrix, optimize it according to the new


requirements, assign a new name, and save the matrix for
reproduction.
Select the drop down arrow to open the drop down list via the
"Administration" card in the group field "Matrix". Select an existing
"Matrix". As an example, "Test_elexir" has been selected in the
figure below.

Matrix selection

2-36

Optional settings

Fig. 2-25

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

The selected matrix name "Test_elexir" is displayed.

Matrix

Fig. 2-26

5 buttons are availble for further handling:


Nr.

Buttons

"Read"

Notes
Reuse existing files

"New"

Create new file

"Delete"

Delete file

"Import"

Import file

"Export"

Export file

Having selected the "Read" button, the "Read" button is displayed


in gray and the group field "Matrix description" is indicated:

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Matrix description

Fig. 2-27

Optional settings

2-37

Created at
Date of the original creation of the loaded marking file is displayed.
Updated at
Date of the upgrade of the loaded marking file is displayed.
Matrix file name
Path with new matrix file name is displayed.
Binning file name
Path with new binning file name is displayed.

Card Marking field/Matrix

Marking field/Matrix

2-38

Optional settings

Fig. 2-28

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Group field Configuration


Width (X)
Total width in X direction in mm
Length (Y)
Total length in Y direction in mm
Pitch (X)
Pitch width in X direction in mm
Pitch (Y)
Pitch length in Y-Richtung in mm
Columns
Number of rows per group

55

55

55

Fig. 2-29

Group columns
Number of groups arranged in columns
Group distance
Distance from group center to group center in mm
Rows
Number of rows
Group rows
Number of groups arranged in rows
Group distance
Distance from group center to group center in mm

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-39

Reference point top right (group center)

1
3

Workpiece
Fig. 2-30

Checkboxes not activated

Checkboxes activated

X start lower left (field center) in mm

X start top right (group center) in mm

Y start lower left (field center) in mm

Y start top right (group center) in mm

2-40

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Group field Marking field

Y = 180

X = 335

25

155

Marking field width (X) in mm

Marking field length (Y) in mm

Overlap

Dimension 25 in mm

A, B

Marking area of head A and head B


Fig. 2-31

Head
Selection Dual for double head system or Single for single head
system
Width (X)
Total width of the double head system in mm
Length (Y)
Total length of the double head system in mm
Overlap
The overlapping marking area (25 mm) can be marked from either
head A or head B
Group field Shift
X offset (X starting value)
Shift in X direction from the marking field of the heads to the matrix
(workpiece)

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-41

Y offset (Y starting value)


Shift in Y direction from the marking field of the heads to the matrix
(workpiece)

Group field Head A


X offset (X starting value)
Starting position of head A, if marking starts in X direction
Y offset (Y starting value)
Starting position of head A, if marking starts in Y direction
Angle
Starting position of the head with set angle gradient
Group field Head B
X offset (X starting value)
Starting position of head B, if marking starts in X direction
Y offset (Y starting value)
Starting position of head B, if marking starts in Y direction
Angle
Starting position of the head with set angle gradient

2-42

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Card Preview
Matrix color
gray
yellow
blue

Meaning
Standard
Selected fields
Newly used fields for marking

Fig. 2-32

X offset (X starting value)


Starting value of the field position in X direction
Y offset (Y starting value)
Starting value of the field position in Y direction
Angle
0, 90, 180, 270 degrees
Binning
4-digit arrangement of letters and digits
Standard: ABCD, all fields are displayed in gray

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-43

Checkbox Marking
Fields to be marked are displayed in blue. Press OK, then save
and generate XML file. The file is adopted.
Button OK
Adopt fields with the OK button and save as marking file (blue
fields).
Button Cancel
Matrix generator is canceled

Preview: Schematic display of matrix width (X) x lenght (Y)

Left arrow pressed (whole matrix is selected and displayed in yellow)

Select a field with a mouse click to activate right arrow; press right arrow
and select individual fields (yellow) which will be marked later in a nonstandard way

Standard preview (gray), select individual fields with right arrow


(displayed in yellow) and then press right arrow once more

Manipulate yellow fields by offset, angle, etc., then classify, mark, press
OK, and save as marking file.

Marking areas

2-44

Fig. 2-33

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

3.6

Imager

The "Imager" allows to mark grayscale pictures quickly and in high


quality.
Prerequisite

The use of the "Imager" requires certain prerequisites as to the


hardware. Please contact the TRUMPF sales department.

Imager

Fig. 2-34

If the option "Imager" is enabled, the additional card "Bitmap"


appears in the dialog window "Administrate laser parameters".
If the checkbox "Imager" is activated, the following applies:

During the fast bitmap marking, each pixel row is run


through just once; the requested shade of gray is set by
variation of the pulse energy from pixel to pixel.

During the fast marking of grayscale bitmaps only one


single laser parameter is allocated to the entire bitmap.
Additional characteristics are assigned to this laser
parameter which enable a variable pulse energy.
If the checkbox "Imager" is not activated, the usual procedure
applies:

The bitmap is lasered in the so-called dithering procedure.

In case several shades of gray are used, each of them is


represented by a separate laser parameter. These are
combined in a sequence which is assigned to the bitmap.

In case several shades of gray are used, these are marked


one after another. Thus the pixel rows of the bitmap are
run through frequently, corresponding to the number of
shades of gray.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-45

Import bitmap
The bitmap import is carried out analog to the usual procedure. It is
recommended to prepare the bitmap to be imported in a way that
size, number of shades of gray, and spatial resolution correspond
to the bitmap to be marked. Marking errors can thus be avoided,
which can otherwise occur due to pixel averaging during the
bitmap import.
The following procedure is recommended:
1) Select the option "Do not modify" via the "Bitmaps" card in
group field "Color depth" and confirm with "OK".

Import of bitmaps

Fig. 2-35

The directory C:\Trumark\Vlf\Greyscale contains special bitmaps


which can be used for optimization. Select the test file with the
requested resolution which is designated "grey_scale_xxxdpi" or
"grey_scale_steps_xxxdpi", and import the file as described here.

2-46

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

2) Select the requested bitmap file under Draw Bitmap.

Grayscale charts and test bitmaps

Fig. 2-36

3) Maintain the preset original size as far as possible.

Bitmaps size

Fig. 2-37

4) Position the bitmap and maintain the original resolution as


far as possible.

Resolution

Fig. 2-38

Note
We recommend resolutions between 300 dpi and 800 dpi. A high
resolution normally offers an improved marking quality, with the
disadvantage that the marking period increases.

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-47

Assign laser parameters


Allocate a laser parameter to the bitmap and activate the "Imager"
(fast bitmap marking) for this parameter. Mark the imported bitmap
on the requested workpiece. The following optimization is carried
out on the basis of the marking result.
Adjust the pixel size. Adjoining pixels should contact in such a way
that no white ranges occur between adjoining black pixels. This
can be seen in the black area of the marked grayscale chart.
Adjustment of the pixel size is carried out via the parameter
"Defocussing". In case the density is too strong or too weak, it can
be optimized with the parameters "Power" or "Pulse frequency". At
first adjust the pulse frequency. To do so it is advisable to set the
power to 95% and increase the pulse frequency as long as the
grayscale chart contains a sufficiently deep black. This guarantees
that the marking period is minimized.
In case no sufficiently deep black can be created despite low pulse
frequences and maximum power, increase the resolution of the
bitmap and at the same time reduce "Defocussing".

Assign main LP

Fig. 2-39

Note
High pulse frequencies can result in marking errors. In this case
select a lower pulse frequency and carry out the reduction via the
"Power" parameter.
During the fast bitmap marking, the parameters "Velocity" and
"Pulse frequency" are inactive. The speed is preset by pulse
frequency and resolution.

2-48

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optimize grayscale chart


Optimization of the grayscale chart is carried out by determining
the density range and the gamma value.
Determine the density range
Adjust the limits of the grayscale chart. This is done by determining
the limits of the density range.

0%

20%

70%

100%

1
2

Density range 0% to 100%


Density range 20% to 70%

Principle grayscale chart

Fig. 2-40

Gamma value
Adjust the density progress within the grayscale chart. This is done
by means of the gamma value.

0.3
1.0
3.0

Fig. 2-41

A gamma value of 1.0 means that the 256 shades of gray are
linearly distributed over the set density range.
With the help of the gamma value, adjust the density progress
within the grayscale chart in such a way that the shades of gray
are evenly distributed over the density range 2.
Note
Individual shades of gray can also be manually adjusted (refer to
page 2-53).

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Optional settings

2-49

Invert grayscale chart

Invert grayscale chart

Fig. 2-42

Particularly with regard to dark workpieces which become lighter


by the laser pulse effect, it can be reasonable that a darker pixel
(i.e. a higher density) corresponds to a lower pulse energy. In this
case the progress of the shades of gray must be inverted. For this
select the "Invert" checkbox.

Define marking direction

4
3
2
1
1 2
Marking direction

3 4
Fig. 2-43

By default bitmaps are dissected in pixel rows in such a way that


they run along the longer extension of the bitmap. So the number
of row changes is reduced and the marking period minimized.

2-50

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

You can influence the dissection in pixel rows by activating the


"use other settings than standard" checkbox and selecting the
marking direction. The following selection is provided:
"auto": standard marking direction
"x":
marking direction horizontal
"y":
marking direction vertical
Marking direction alternating
5
4
3
2
1

Marking direction alternating

Fig. 2-44

By selecting the "Alternating" checkbox the marking period is


reduced because adjoining pixel rows are marked in opposite
direction. The step length from one pixel row end to the next pixel
row beginning is shortened.
Lag delay
A little displacement in direction of the pixel rows, which can occur
between adjoining pixel rows during alternating marking, is
eliminated by optimizing the lag delay.

Alternating and lag delay

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Fig. 2-45

Optional settings

2-51

Other settings than standard


The following settings require the know-how of bitmap marking.
Therefore these settings should only be carried out by specially
trained personnel.
Mode 2
In case of very delicate workpieces it can be advantageous to use
mode 2. Mode 2 guarantees that no laser radiation emits in the
white bitmap ranges.
Note
Mode 2 results in more marking errors which requires to optimize
smoothing and frame correction.

Bitmap mode

Fig. 2-46

Smoothing
By means of the smoothing, it is possible to correct marking errors
at the transitions between different shades of gray. It is
recommended to carry out the optimization on the basis of a test
bitmap.
Adequate
bitmaps
can
be
found
in
the
C:\Trumark\Vlf\Greyscale directory.

2-52

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Frame correction
By means of the frame correction it is possible to correct marking
errors at the beginning of a pixel row.
Note
If the selected values for the smoothing or frame correction are too
high, individual pixels can be lacking particularly at the beginning of
a pixel row.
Adjust shades of gray manually
The displayed percent values refer to the interval within the set
limits of the density range 2 (refer to Fig. 2-40). The density level
can later be manually changed for each individual shade of gray.
Note
On the basis of the set gamma value, the software calculates the
density level for each shade of gray.
Density level values entered manually are deleted by other
inputs!
Loss of the manually entered values.
CAUTION

Do not change the number of shades of gray or the gamma


value after the density levels have been manually optimized.

White levels
Occurring damages of workpieces when dealing with white pixels
can be counteracted my means of the white levels. A selectable
number of the lightest shades of gray can be set on the minimal
possible pulse energy.

White levels

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Fig. 2-47

Optional settings

2-53

2-54

Optional settings

SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010

Chapter 3

Marking interface

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

1.
1.1
1.2

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark ............................ 3-3


Starting............................................................................. 3-3
Exiting .............................................................................. 3-3

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Start screen .................................................................... 3-4


Running a marking program ............................................ 3-5
Loading a marking program............................................. 3-6
Viewing the marking program .......................................... 3-7
Starting the marking program .......................................... 3-7

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Working with the marking interface........................... 3-11


Buttons and function keys.............................................. 3-11
Status area .................................................................... 3-14
Starting the marking program ........................................ 3-20
Menus ............................................................................ 3-23

4.
4.1
4.2

File menu ...................................................................... 3-24


> 1 Open ........................................................................ 3-24
> 2 Exit........................................................................... 3-24

5.

Laser menu................................................................... 3-25

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark

3-1

3-2

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

> 1 Pilot laser setup ....................................................... 3-25


> 2 Multiple marking ...................................................... 3-26
> 3 Scanner (Autocalibration) ........................................ 3-26
> 4 Reset ....................................................................... 3-27

6.

Module menu................................................................ 3-28

7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10

Tools menu................................................................... 3-29


> 1 CAD Editor............................................................... 3-29
> 2 Diagnostics tool ....................................................... 3-29
> 3 Supply unit simulator ............................................... 3-30
> 4 QuickFlow ................................................................ 3-30
> 5 Error display............................................................. 3-31
> 6 TLV Test Tool .......................................................... 3-32
> 7 MatrixGenerator....................................................... 3-33
> 8 GridGenerator.......................................................... 3-33
> 9 Check laser power................................................... 3-33
> 10 Calibrate laser power............................................. 3-33

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6

Extras menu ................................................................. 3-34


> 1 Change user level.................................................... 3-35
> 26 Change status displays ....................................... 3-36
> 7 Configuration ........................................................... 3-36
> 8 Registry backup ....................................................... 3-46
> 9 Delete current VCT files .......................................... 3-46
> 10 Delete all VCT files ................................................ 3-47

9.
9.1
9.2

Workstation menu ....................................................... 3-48


> 1 Referencing ............................................................. 3-48
> 2 Configuration ........................................................... 3-48

10.
10.1
10.2

Help menu .................................................................... 3-50


> 1 TruTops Mark......................................................... 3-50
> 2 Info........................................................................... 3-50

11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7

Modules ........................................................................ 3-51


Control with external data communication..................... 3-51
Control with workstation................................................. 3-52
Control with digital interface........................................... 3-53
QuickFlow control .......................................................... 3-53
Control with serial interface ........................................... 3-53
Control with TCP/IP interface ........................................ 3-54
Control with COM interface............................................ 3-54

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

1.

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark

1.1

Starting

The TruTops Mark program is automatically started when the


laser marking system is switched on.
The program runs on Windows XP and can be restarted when the
program has been exited and without switching the laser marking
system off in the same manner as other Windows programs.
TruTops Mark is linked with this icon.

1.2

Exiting

You can exit the TruTops Mark program by:


selecting the "Exit" item in the "File" menu or
pressing the key combination <Alt + F4> or
click the button in the top right corner of the screen using
the mouse.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Starting and exiting TruTops Mark

3-3

2.

Start screen

The start screen (refer to Fig. 3-1) of the TruTops Mark program
contains:
A menu bar and buttons for controlling the program functions
and the laser
A status area with indicators
With the TruTops Mark program you can:
Control all the laser marking system functions
Generate marking programs
Start marking programs
Select sequential programs
Edit sequential programs
Start sequential programs
Using different tools, settings specific to hardware and
software are tested, monitored and changed.

TruTops Mark start screen

3-4

Start screen

Fig. 3-1

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

2.1

Running a marking program

This main section describes how to load and then start a marking
program.
If your laser marking system features a pilot laser (option), you can
execute a marking program for set-up purposes with the pilot laser.
Chapter 2 describes how to proceed.
If you have not already saved a marking program on the computer
of your laser marking system or if you do not have any experience
with the content and generation of marking programs, please read
Chapter 3, Section 3.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Start screen

3-5

2.2
Loading a marking program

Loading a marking program

1. Press the <F11> function key

or click the "Marking file" button.


The "Load CAD file" dialog opens on the screen.

"Load CAD file" dialog window

Fig. 3-2

2. Select the required marking program.


3. Click the "Open" button.
The dialog disappears. The path and the name of the selected
marking program is contained in the "marking file" line.

"Marking file" line

Fig. 3-3

The selected marking program is loaded and can be started.

3-6

Start screen

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

2.3

Viewing the marking program

Select the "Mark preview" option in the "Extras" menu to preview


an image of the loaded marking program.

Mark preview

Fig. 3-4

When the correct marking program is loaded, proceed with Section


2.4 to start the marking program.

2.4

Starting the marking program

Prerequisites:
The focus between the workpiece and the lens has been set
correctly.
The emergency circuit is closed.
The laser is ready.

Status "Emergency circuit open"

Fig. 3-5

When the emergency circuit is open, the status display "Emergency circuit open" is red. When the emergency circuit is closed, it
is gray.
When you perform the steps described below, the marking content
of the loaded marking program is transferred to your workpiece
with the laser.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Start screen

3-7

Preparation

1. Place a workpiece onto the marking field of the laser marking


system.

Positioning the workpiece

Fig. 3-6

2. If a protection cover is provided:


Close the cover.

Status "Safety circuit open"

Fig. 3-7

The status "Safety circuit open" changes from red to gray.

3-8

Start screen

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

3. Press the <Shift + F2> function key


or click the "Laser" button.
The laser is switched on.

The status "Laser on" switches from gray to yellow to green.


4. Press the <Shift + F3> function key
or click the "Shutter" button.
The shutter is opened. The Q-switch remains closed. No laser
light is emitted.
The status display "Shutter open" changes from gray to yellow
and after a short time to green.
All preparatory work has then been completed for marking.
Note
When marking in connection with a TruMark Station, the
configuration can be set so that the laser is switched on during
start-up and the shutter is opened.

During the next step laser radiation is emitted from the


lens.
WARNING

Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent


damage to your eyes.
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear
laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser light.

Laser marking systems:


with wavelength 1064 nm (infrared)
with wavelength 532 nm (green)
with wavelength 355 nm (ultraviolet)
Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece.
Never look into the lens.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Start screen

3-9

Starting the marking program

5. Press the <F12> function key

or click the "Marking" button.

The laser marking system then runs the marking program. The
laser radiation is emitted with a high pulse power and marks the
workpiece in accordance with the data in the marking program.

Running of the marking program

3-10

Start screen

Fig. 3-8

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

3.

Working with the marking interface

3.1

Buttons and function keys

The buttons can be used to activate the most important functions


of the marking interface with the click of a mouse.
The same functions can be selected by pressing the corresponding
function keys on the keyboard. The function key is stated on the
button.
Example:
To open the CAD you can either click the "F10 CAD" button shown
here or the <F10> function key on the keyboard.
If the function key name is preceded by "^", this key must be
pressed while the <Shift> key is held down.
The buttons are combined in a vertical bar on the right-hand edge
of the menu.
Right-hand bar

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

3-11

Buttons

The main buttons are explained in more detail on the following


pages.
The laser is switched on and off with the "^F2 Laser" button.
The following functions are activated when the system is switched
on:
Cooling on
Flow in cooling circuit checked
Laser on
When the laser is switched on, the color of the icon on the button
changes from black to yellow. The corresponding LED lights up on
the system status display, first in yellow (the supply unit has
received the command to switch the laser on). When the laser has
been switched on, the color of the LED changes to green.
Note
When the "F2" button has been clicked, no laser light is emitted.
This only occurs when the shutter has been opened and the
marking operation started.

The "^F3 Shutter" button serves to make the laser ready for
marking operations and also to cancel readiness for operation.
When switching on, the expander shutter unit (ESU), will open.
When the function is active, the color of the button icon changes
from black to yellow, the color of the corresponding LED in the
status display changes to green.

WARNING

When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the
laser marking system are not accommodated inside a
protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1,
direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is
possible!
Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent
damage to your eyes.
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear
laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser radiation.
With the "^F4 Reset" button a reset of the supply unit can be
initiated or the currently running marking operation can be cancelled in the event of an error.

3-12

Working with the marking interface

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

If your laser marking system contains a pilot laser, it can be


switched on or off with this button.
When the function is active, the color of the button icon changes
from black to red.
The pilot laser is described in more detail in Chapter 2 Section 3.4
"Pilot laser".
Note
If the marking operation is started when the pilot laser is activated,
laser light of laser protection class 2 is emitted.
With the "F10 CAD" button the CAD is started which is used to
generate and modify marking programs.
More detailed information on the CAD is given in Chapter 4.

The button "F11 Marking file" is used to load a marking program


(from a hard disk, network, CD-ROM or floppy disk).
The path and name of the selected marking program is displayed
in the "marking file" line of the marking interface.
With the "F12 Marking" button the currently selected marking program can be started with the marking laser or pilot laser.
When the laser is ready the marking operation is run in the set
mode.

WARNING

When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the
laser marking system are not accommodated inside a
protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1,
direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is
possible!!
Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent
damage to your eyes.
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear
laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser radiation.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

3-13

3.2
System status

Status area

The status area shows the condition of the laser, the pilot laser and
the laser marking system. This area is divided into three sections.

System status

Fig. 3-9

The top section (1) of "System status" displays the condition of the
following parameters:
Speed of the laser in mm/s
Power of the laser in percentage of the maximum power
Cycle time, i.e. the duration of a cycle in seconds (in the cycle
time with a TruMark Station, for example, the time for closing
the doors is also included)
Pulse repetition frequency of the laser in Hz
Defocus, i.e. the current displacement of the focus position of
the laser beam in relation to the focusing distance of the
employed optics in millimeters (refer to Chapter 4, "Laser
menu" > "Laser parameters" > "Defocusing").
Marking time, i.e. the duration of the actual marking operation
in seconds.
Ready indicators (2) are located on the lower left of the display
field which light up in green when the different functions are ready.
The right-hand part of the status section (3) contains red warning
and error indicators which light up to point out possible problems.
Note
When the indicators "Safety circuit open", "Emergency circuit
open" or "Error" light up, the laser is not ready and marking is not
possible.

3-14

Working with the marking interface

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Status display

The display in the lower section of the marking interface is variable


and can be selected in the "Extras" menu (also refer to Section 7.7
"Extras menu").
Proceed as follows to select a setting:
Click the "Extras" menu in the menu bar
or
Press the keys <Alt + 5>.
The following displays can be selected:

IO status: Shows the status of the digital interface of the laser


marking system or the laser unit.

IO status

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

Fig. 3-10

3-15

Mark preview: The display field shows the marking program


on which the current marking operation is based in a minimized
version of the CAD. Various buttons are provided on the lefthand side for changing the view (refer to Section "View menu"
in Chapter 4 for a more detailed description).
Print: Via the print icon you will have access to the print dialog
of your printer (refer to Section "File menu" in Chapter 4 for a
more detailed description).

Mark preview

3-16

Working with the marking interface

Fig. 3-11

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Laser parameters: Shows the status of the internal laser


parameters. The current delays when the laser is switched on
and off, at the ends of polygons and for laser jumps are
displayed in microseconds. In addition, the current step and
pulse width (in microseconds) and the jump speed (in
millimeters per second) as well as the following offsets are
shown: of the power (in percent), of the frequency (in hertz), of
the speed (in millimeters per second) and of the defocus (in
millimeters). It is also displayed whether the suppression of the
first pulse is active. Please refer to Chapter 4 "Laser menu" >
"Laser parameters" for more information on these parameters.

Status laser parameters

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

Fig. 3-12

3-17

Error, warning history: This field shows a list of the errors


and warnings which occurred last. The list contains the date
and the time at which the respective error occurred, the error
code and a short text in which the type of occurring error is
described. Double-clicking on the message opens the detailed
display.

Error, warning history

3-18

Working with the marking interface

Fig. 3-13

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

RTC status: The type, the mode and the installed options of
the scanner card (RTC) are displayed at the top. In the lower
half of the status display, the exact marking time and the list
commands (microvectors) of the marking last started are
shown. "Restart_mark" shows the number of markings which
have been activated using the digital input Restart_mark. (Also
see interface description.) When operating with marking on the
fly (MOF) and an encoder, the number of pulses of the
connected encoder are shown in the X counter and Y counter.
The REI inputs and outputs are displayed: when selecting the
entry field the assignment is shown.

RTC status

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

Fig. 3-14

3-19

3.3

Starting the marking program

Proceed as follows to load a marking program:


Selection of the marking
program

With the mouse click the "F11 Marking file" button or press the
<F11> function key or select the menu item "File" > "Open".
The "Load CAD file" dialog window appears on the screen. The
marking program can be selected in this window.

"Load CAD file" dialog window

Fig. 3-15

When the dialog box has been closed, the name of the
marking program is displayed in the "Marking file" line.

Check that the correct program has been selected:


In the "Extras" menu select the "Mark preview" option; the
marking program on which the current marking operation is
based is then displayed in a minimized version of the CAD.
The CAD can also be started with the "F10 CAD" button or the
<F10> function key. The interface of the CAD with the graphic
of the selected marking program appears in the drawing field.

3-20

Working with the marking interface

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

To execute a marking operation with the laser marking system


certain prerequisites must be met:
activated laser marking system
started TruTops Mark program
correctly set optics (refer to Section 8.3 "> 7 Configuration" >
"Machine")
selected marking program

Execution

When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the
laser marking system are not accommodated inside a
protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1,
direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is
possible!
WARNING
Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent
damage to your eyes.
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear
laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser radiation.
Proceed as follows:
Place the workpiece into the marking field of the laser marking
system (if necessary and fitted, use the pilot laser for
alignment).
Ensure that the laser has the correct focus to the workpiece.
Close the protective cover if it is fitted.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Ensure that the marking surface is in the "Marking program"


mode (also refer to the section "Buttons", "Marking program". If
necessary click the "F7 Marking program" button or press the
<F7> function key. (Only in conjunction with a TruMark
Station).

Click the "^F2 Laser" button or press <F2> while holding down
the <Shift> key. The color of the icon on the "^F2 Laser" button
changes from black to yellow.

Working with the marking interface

3-21

3-22

Click the "^F3 Shutter" button or press <F3> while holding


down the <Shift> key. The laser is run with the set power and
the shutter is opened. The color of the icon on the "^F2 Laser"
button changes from black to yellow.

Click the "F12 Marking" button or press the <F12> function


key. On a TruMark Station alternatively the start key can be
pressed. The laser marking system then performs the marking
operation. During this operation high-power laser radiation is
emitted and marks the workpiece in accordance with the set
program. With a TruMark Station the door closes when the
program is started and opens when it has been completed.

Working with the marking interface

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

3.4

Menus

A menu bar with the following menus is provided on the screen of


the marking interface:

File
Laser
Module
Tools
Extras
Workstation
Help

Menu bar

Fig. 3-16

The menus contain functions which can only be activated with the
respective pull-down menu.
The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or with the
keyboard.
Activation with the mouse:
Click the respective menu in the menu bar.

The corresponding pull-down menu opens.


Select the respective function in the pull-down menu.
Activation with the keyboard:
Press the keys <Alt + Hotkey>.

The corresponding pull-down menu appears on the


screen.
Note
<Hotkey> is the key with the number in front of the respective
menu.
Example: 1 File: <Hotkey> is key 1.
Press the Hotkey of the required function in the pull-down
menu
or
move the highlighting bar to the correct position in the menu
with the arrow keys.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Working with the marking interface

3-23

4.

File menu

File menu

4.1

Fig. 3-17

> 1 Open

This function can be used to open marking files which have been
generated in the CAD. The opened file controls the marking
operation of the laser. The "File" menu contains a list of the files
which were opened last. These can be reopened by clicking with
the mouse or by pressing the <Enter> key.

4.2

> 2 Exit

This function terminates the TruTops Mark program. This is also


possible with the key combination <Alt + F4> or by clicking with the
mouse in the exit box (top right).

3-24

File menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

5.

Laser menu

Laser menu

5.1

Fig. 3-18

> 1 Pilot laser setup

This submenu is provided for selecting the operating mode of the


pilot laser (also refer to Chapter 2 Section 3.4 "Pilot laser").
Pilot laser -> Setup

"Pilot laser setup" dialog window

Fig. 3-19

Group field Mode


Selection of whether the pilot laser should generate an "outline" or
a "rectangle".
Group field Mark settings
Select "Endless marking"
The pilot laser marks infinitely in the same way.
Select "Restart after marking"
After the marking process, the pilot laser restarts automatically only
with a TruMark Station and without segmentation.
Speed
Setting of the pilot laser speed in millimeters per second.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Laser menu

3-25

5.2

> 2 Multiple marking

In this submenu it is possible to define how often the marking laser


should execute the marking operation of the active marking file.
The set value is reset to 1 by clicking the "Reset" button or by
changing the marking file.
Marking -> Setup

"Marking setup" dialog window

5.3

Fig. 3-20

> 3 Scanner (Autocalibration)

In this submenu it is possible to determine the reference values for


scanner calibration by means of an automatic calibration.
Click "3 Scanner > 1 Set reference values".
Confirm the following "Calibration" message with "Yes".

Fig. 3-21

Then click "3 Scanner > 2 Start calibration".


The calibration is carried out.
In a further step it is also possible to switch the calibration off again
by clicking "3 Scanner > 3 Turn off compensation".

3-26

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

5.4

> 4 Reset

This function reinitializes the laser. The "Reset" function must be


activated after a warning or error message from the user.
It also serves to terminate the currently active marking operation. If
the marking operation is restarted, this starts again from the
beginning.
A marking operation can also be terminated with the key combination <Ctrl or Strg key + C>.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Laser menu

3-27

6.

Module menu

If TruTops Mark is controlled by external systems or used to


control a laser marking system or a laser unit, the marking
interface on the right-hand side will be extended by one module.
The required module can be started with the "Module" submenu.
The started module appears in the right-hand display area of the
marking interface.
Information on the Module menu can be found in Section 11
"Modules".

3-28

Module menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

7.

Tools menu

The "Tools" menu can be used to start various programs with


which the marking operation can be monitored, controlled and
checked for errors. In addition the CAD can be started in this
menu. In Chapter 2 more detailed descriptions on the options are
given:
7 MatrixGenerator
8 GridGenerator
9 LPM
10 LPC

Tools menu

7.1

Fig. 3-22

> 1 CAD Editor

This function starts the CAD with which the marking programs are
generated.
You can find details on working with the CAD in Chapter 4, "CAD".
Note
The CAD can also be started in the marking interface by clicking
on the button "F10 CAD" or by pressing the function key <F10> on
the keyboard.

7.2

> 2 Diagnostics tool

This functions starts the diagnostics tool in which the system status
of a large number of parameters of the laser device, especially of
the control unit and the laser head, can be displayed and an error
log output.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Tools menu

3-29

7.3

> 3 Supply unit simulator

This function starts the supply unit simulator for the laser marking
system or the laser unit. This software is used to run the
TruTopsMark on a PC without a connected laser. Here various
parameters on the supply unit and the parallel digital interface of
the laser marking system/laser unit can be changed.

7.4

> 4 QuickFlow

This menu item only appears when the QuickFlow software extension is installed on your system (option).
This function starts the TRUMPF QuickFlow-Editor. Complex
sequential programs which control the entire marking cycle from
beginning to end can be generated graphically by using QuickFlow.
All interfaces for the laser marking systems can be controlled using
QuickFlow, and data from external sources can be read out.The
link to external databanks can be established efficiently.
Also refer to the section "Control with external data communication". Details on the principle of operation of the QuickFlowEditor are contained in the separate documentation "QuickFlow
Programming software for generating visual sequential programs".

3-30

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

7.5

> 5 Error display

This function opens a dialog window that serves to permit display


of the error description (error display) for a certain error code.
Note
The error display is mainly provided for TRUMPF service
technicians; if a customer reports an error code, the service
technician can display the error description with this tool.
Error display

"Error display" dialog window

Fig. 3-23

Id:
Identification number of the component in which the error was
signaled (e.g. CIP = 51, TruTops Mark-SW = 53).
Num:
Number of the components as one component can be contained in
the system several times.
Code:
Hexadecimal display of the error code.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Tools menu

3-31

Display button
When this button is clicked, a window is opened which shows the
effect, the cause, the necessary measures and possible other
details of the occurred fault.

Error info

Fig. 3-24

The previous or next error message can be displayed by clicking


either "Previous cause" or "Next cause".
The window can be closed by clicking the "F9" button or by
pressing the corresponding function key.

7.6

> 6 TLV Test Tool

If TruTops Mark is controlled by the exchange of data with


externals systems, this function permits the activation of a test tool
with which TLV control commands for the serial commands for the
serial interface, profibus, TCP/IP and COM interface can be tested.
You can find information for the TLV control commands in the interface description "TLV commands and interpreter for TruTops
Mark software program".

3-32

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

7.7

> 7 MatrixGenerator

The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.5

7.8

> 8 GridGenerator

The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.6

7.9

> 9 Check laser power

The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.2

7.10 > 10 Calibrate laser power


The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.3

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Tools menu

3-33

8.

Extras menu

The user level can be changed in the "Extras" menu. It also


permits the setting of various status displays in the left-hand lower
range of the display area. In addition to this, different TruTops
Mark settings can be configured, a registry backup can be made,
and the current or all VCT files can be deleted.

Extras menu

3-34

Extras menu

Fig. 3-25

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

8.1

> 1 Change user level

If this function is activated, a dialog window opens in which it is


possible to change the user level.
Change user level

"Change user level" dialog window

Fig. 3-26

There are two user levels available to the customer:


"Operator": This user level is not activated when the unit is
supplied. The level can be activated in the menu "Extras" >
"Configuration" > "User management". The operator works on
this user level. Individual menu functions described in this
documentation can be enabled or disabled on this level.
Access of the operator can be restricted accordingly in this
way.
"Customer": The customer works on this user level. It permits
access to all functions of the marking interface described in
this documentation. If the "Operator" level is not activated, the
operator also works on this level. All options which have to be
set for the operator are described in Chapter 2.
"Service": Access is restricted to the TRUMPF service
personnel. On this user level it is possible to perform further
service settings in the marking interface. A password is
necessary for changing to this user level.
"Production": Access is restricted to the TRUMPF service
personnel. On this user level it is possible to make basic
settings in the marking interface. A password is necessary for
changing to this user level.
Note
Basic settings for the program environment of the TruTops Mark
software are defined on the "Service" and "Production" levels.
Access to these user levels is therefore only possible for TRUMPF
service and production personnel.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-35

8.2

> 26 Change status displays

In the "Extras" menu it is possible to select the status displays


which should be shown in the bottom left hand display area of the
marking interface.
A description of the possible status displays and their functions is
contained in Section 3.2 "Status area" > "Status displays".

8.3

> 7 Configuration

In this submenu it is possible to change various basic settings in


the marking interface.
> Configuration > Card Machine
Settings

"Machine" dialog window

Fig. 3-27

The parameters described below can be defined in this dialog


window.
Group field Optics selection
In the "Optic type" field the laser optics can be selected. If a new
optic is selected, the values in the fields "Marking field" "Focus"
and "Max. defocus" change accordingly. Only those optical
systems which are available for the current system are offered.

3-36

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Group field Laser offset


In the entry fields the offset values are entered: in the field "Laser
power" it is possible to enter an offset of the maximum laser power
as a percentage; in addition the frequency and the laser speed as
well as the defocus, i.e. the shifting of the focus position of the
laser beam toward the focus distance of the used optic can be
entered.
The parameters affect all marking programs.
As long as an offset is active, the corresponding display field
appears in yellow in the system status, refer to Section 3.2.
Group field XY-Table correction
This function permits the adjustment of the marking area. If an
offset should occur in the marking result if the XY-table is used,
this can be compensated for by setting offset values. Both
horizontal and vertical directions and the angle can be corrected.
Group field Segmentation
The starting point for the segmentation can be set with the offset
values of the segmentation.
The segmentation offset values have no effect if the "Take the axis
position by segmentation" checkbox (configuration of the workstation module) is activated. The segmentation is started on the
spot. The segmentation offset values are used if "Take the axis
position by segmentation" is not activated. The offset values for the
respective axes (A, X, Y and Z) are used as starting point for the
segmentation.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-37

> Configuration > Card GUI


Settings

"GUI" (Graphical User Interface) dialog window

Fig. 3-28

The following parameters can be defined in this dialog window.


Group field Language switching
Enables the selection of 20 national languages at present. The
following languages are available: German, English, French,
Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Portuguese, Hungarian, Japanese, simplified Chinese, traditional
Chinese, Korean, Malay, Turkish, and Rumanian.
Group field Video sequence
For playing short video clips during marking at the top right in the
TRUMPF logo.
Group field Units of measure for lengths
Stipulates whether the lengths in the program are displayed as
metric measurements ("SI units") or in inches (US/UK units).

3-38

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Group field Operating mode


Defines whether marking operations are actually performed
("Activate mechanical system" or only simulated ("Simulation").
Simulation mode serves to run the TruTops Mark software on
PCs without laser. After selecting "Activate mechanical system" the
serial interface COM2 is assigned for controlling the mechanical
axis (on a TruMark Station). The selection function "RTC card
available" informs the TruTops Mark software whether a scanner
card is installed or not.
Group field Start conditions
Defines the behavior of the marking interface with a new start. If
"Start last module" is activated, the software loads the last used
display module (also refer to Section 10, "Modules"). If "Start last
tool" is activated, the software loads the last settings made in the
"Extras" menu (also refer to Section 7.7 "Extras menu").
If "Used last VLF directory" is activated, the software sets the path
so that the marking programs generated with the CAD are loaded
to the path which was last used.
If the "Load last loaded marking file" is activated, CAD
automatically loads the VLF file last opened when the software
starts up.
If "Delete VCT files" is activated, the software deletes the VCT files
which were last generated. The marking programs generated in the
CAD are automatically converted into VCT files by the TruTops

Mark so that they can act as marking programs.


If these are no longer required (for example to save space), they
can be automatically deleted with this function.
Note
When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as
series numbers) are reset to their original values.
When "Full Screen" is activated, the user interface uses the entire
monitor.
In the field "Laser power", you can set the percentage power value
of the laser which the laser is to have when TruTops Mark starts
up.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-39

> Configuration > Card Directories


This window is used to define the standard directories for various
file types with which the marking interface works.
Settings

"Directories" dialog window

Fig. 3-29

The following file types can be assigned standard directories:


The CAD settings are saved in the file 'CAD-INI.XML'.
Marking programs which are generated in the CAD.
Font files, i.e. saved font information.
Snapshot files which are temporary marking files which are
created with the snapshot function. (Refer to Chapter 3,
"Laser" menu > "Snapshot".)
Vector files: TruTops Mark converts loaded marking programs
with the extension .VLF automatically into vector files with the
extension .VCT, which contain the machine code of the
marking program.
Mark files external control files: standard directory for the
marking files when using the "Serial interface", "Digital
interface", "Profibus", "TCP/IP" or "COM" modules.

3-40

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

> Configuration > Card Digital interface


The inputs and outputs of the parallel digital interface of the laser
marking system/laser unit can be activated/deactivated in this
dialog window.
When the inputs are activated, TruTops Mark responds to each
input of the digital interface. When these are deactivated, the
digital inputs can be used elsewhere (QuickFlow, other modules)
When the digital outputs are activated, TruTops Mark uses these
outputs according to their function. If these are deactivated, the
outputs can be used elsewhere.
Note
The input "Restart_mark" / "Abort_mark" has a special function.
When this input is activated, TruTops Mark switches over into the
retrigger mode. The markings can no longer be started with "F12
marking".
The marking files must firstly be loaded into the deflection card
using the TLV command or QuickFlow. The marking itself will then
be immediately started by means of this input.
Settings

"Digital interface" dialog window

Fig. 3-30

Details on the principle of operation of the interface are given in the


extra interface description.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-41

> Configuration > Card Miscellaneous


Here it is possible to activate or deactivate different modes of
TruTops Mark behavior.
Settings

"Miscellaneous" dialog window

Fig. 3-31

Group field Variable import

with existing variable IDs (without selection) or


with newly generated variable IDs (with selection).

Group field APL logging


In case "Recording APL-calls to" is selected, then all processes in
the configured file will be recorded.
Group field Mark counter
As long as "Reset when accumulated value reached" is selected,
the marking counter is set to zero as soon as the counter reaches
the final value.
Group field Reaction of input control off
With this option it is possible to exit not only the TruTops Mark
software but also the operating system when shutting down the
control.

3-42

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Group field Time of conversion


TruTops Mark converts marking programs (with the extension
'VLF') automatically into vector files (with the extension 'VCT').
With this option, you can configure when this conversion is to take
place. When loading the marking file or when starting the marking
> Configuration > Card Options
On this dialog window you can enable options and software
features. Contact the Trumpf branch office in your country.
Settings

"Options" dialog window

Fig. 3-32

Select "Segmentation"
This option enables the segmentation of the marking field and the
marking of all segments in one marking procedure.
Select "Profibus"
This option enables the control of the laser marking system via
Profibus.
Select "QuickFlow"
Complex sequential programs which control the entire marking
cycle from beginning to end can be generated graphically by using
QuickFlow. All interfaces for the laser marking system laser can be
controlled using QuickFlow, and data from external sources can be
read out. The link to external databanks can be established
efficiently.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-43

Select "Pilot laser"


The pilot laser gives off a red light through the laser optics with a
small amount of power. For setup purposes, marking procedures
are simulated with the pilot laser before actual markings are made
on the workpiece.
Select "Marking on the fly"
The option "Marking on the fly" offers the possibility of marking
moved workpieces (abbreviation = MOF). This option is described
in the "Interface description (Marking laser devices with TruTops

Mark control software)".


Select "Multihead"
The option Multihead enables a second laser head to be
controlled.
Select "Focus finder (Z Axis)"
With this option, the working distance can be automatically set.
This means that after measuring the distance, the Z axis moves to
the correct position.
At present, there is no description on this option.
Select "MatrixGenerator"
This option enables matrix definitions, e.g. for semiconductor
applications.
Select "GridGenerator"
This option enables the creation of simple geometric bodies with
the aid of a XML file.
Select "AutoCalibration"
This option enables a compensation of the scanner thermal drif.
Select "Navigator"
This option enables beginners to carry out marking procedures
quickly and simply.
Select "LPM"
This option enables the laser power measurement.
Select "LPC"
This option enables the lase power calibration.
Select "FastBitmapMarking"
This option enables the fast marking of bitmaps.

3-44

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

> Configuration > Card User management


User management is not activated when the system is supplied.
The TruTops Mark software starts with the user level: "Customer"
without requesting a password with all rights of the customer.
More detailed information on the settings is given in Chapter 2.
Settings

"User management" dialog window

Fig. 3-33

User management can be activated by the customer in the dialog


shown above. When user management has been activated, the
system reacts as follows:
The additional user level "Operator" is available.
The menu functions enabled on the "Operator" level can be
configured individually.
On the "Customer" user level the password prompt is active. It
cannot be deactivated.
On the "Operator" level the password prompt is active.
It can be deactivated.
The default password for "Operator" is: worker
The default password for "Customer" is: customer

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-45

8.4

> 8 Registry backup

Fig. 3-34

This function can be used to save a backup copy of the registry file
of the TruTops Mark software in the TruTops Mark backup
directory.

8.5

> 9 Delete current VCT files

Fig. 3-35

The currently active VCT files can be deleted with this function.
TruTops Mark converts loaded marking programs (with the
extension 'VLF') automatically to vector files (with the extension
'VCT'). If these are no longer required (for example to save space),
they can be deleted with this function.
Note
When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as
serial numbers) are reset to their original values.

3-46

Extras menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

8.6

> 10 Delete all VCT files

Fig. 3-36

This function can be used to delete all VCT files in the VCT
directory.
In the Section 8.3 "Extras > "Configuration > "Directories" the
standard directories can be defined also for VCT files. TruTops
Mark saves all the generated VCT files in this directory.
Note
When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as
serial numbers) are reset to their original values.

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Extras menu

3-47

9.

Workstation menu

Workstation menu

9.1

Fig. 3-37

> 1 Referencing

When referencing, the corresponding axis moves to the reference


point. At the same time, ensure that the reference point for the Z
axis is not the zero point but the largest possible distance to the
working area. Referencing can be done for each axis individually or
for all active axes together.

9.2

> 2 Configuration

Configuration menu (example)

Fig. 3-38

The menu items given below are only displayed if they are actually
available in the sequential or marking mode.
Select "Shutter open"
The shutter is opened when the workstation is started up.
Select "Laser on"
The laser is switched on when the workstation is started up.

3-48

Workstation menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Select "Reference axis"


The axes are automatically referenced when the workstation is
started up. This menu item must be selected to enable the
positioning of the axis.
Select "Use start button"
The start button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.
Select "Use stop button"
The stop button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.
Select "Mark without axis positioning"
In the marking mode, the laser automatically moves to the entered
positions when marking is started. With this option, this behavior
can be switched off.
Select "Starting automatically after closing door"
The workstation starts automatically when the door is closed.
Select "Approaching loading position after end of marking"
After marking has been completed, the laser moves forwards on
the Y axis to the door.
Select "Take the axis position by segmentation"
If you select a segmented file, segmentation starts at the current
position of the workstation.
Select "Rotating the A axis to 0 degrees"
When using a TruMark Station 5000 (R), the A axis is moved to
position 0 after quitting the marking process.
Select "Door check with function 'Marking'"
The workstation starts the marking automatically when the door is
closed.
Select "Rotating the A axis to 0 degrees after segmentation"
When using a TruMark Station, the A axis is moved to position 0
after segmentation and quitting of the marking process. This does
not apply to TruMark Station 5000 (R).

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Workstation menu

3-49

Option A axis on/A axis off


The A axis is switched on or off.
Select "Position Z axis"
When quitting the workstation, the positions of the active axes are
saved. If the machine is restarted and the menu item "Reference
axis" is selected, the laser automatically moves to the axis
positions last saved.
Door position
The doorway can be carried out in several heights.
Group field Station A/B
When using a TruMark Station 5000 (R), the offset function
enables to correct the marking area in horizontal and vertical
direction and in the angle.

10.

Help menu

Help menu

Fig. 3-39

10.1 > 1 TruTops Mark


This function is used to activate the help system of the TruTops
Mark software.

10.2 > 2 Info


This function can be used to activate a window which contains
information on the version of the TruTops Mark software.

3-50

Help menu

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

11.

Modules

11.1 Control with external data


communication
TruTops Mark can be controlled via various interfaces with
external data communication. In this case a specific module is
shown on the right-hand side of the programming interface. The
global (vertically arranged) buttons are then positioned on its righthand edge. Additional, horizontally arranged buttons appear which
serve for operation of the displayed module.
In the "Modules" menu the modules can be displayed and hidden.
The following modules are provided:
Workstation
Digital interface
Profibus
QuickFlow
Serial interface
TCP/IP
COM interface
If one of these functions is activated, the status of the respective
interface is displayed in the marking interface.
A control light appears in the header of the right-hand display area
behind the name of the activated interface. This lights up in green
when the interface communication is functional. If the interface
cannot be addressed, it lights up in red.
TLV control

If the module "Serial interface", "Profibus", "TCP/IP" or "COM" is


active, the external communication takes place with the TLV
protocol (Tag Length Value). The horizontal buttons at the bottom
can be used for
creating and deleting monitoring protocols (monitor),
making protocols of TLV control commands in a file (setup),
finding and checking TLV control commands,
configuring, displaying and resetting the settings of the respective interface.
You can find information for the TLV control commands in the
interface description "TLV commands and interpreter for TruTops
Mark software program".

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Modules

3-51

11.2 Control with workstation


The workstation module appears when the marking interface runs
on a TruMark Station. The programming interface is extended by
one section on the right-hand side, the global (vertically arranged)
buttons are then positioned on its right-hand edge. Additional,
horizontally arranged buttons appear in the lower section with
which the functions of the laser unit can be controlled.

5
3

6.

1 Laser parameters of the marking

4 Display / Entry of the axis positions

file
2 Status of machine components

5 Laser-related buttons

3 Status display

6 Machine and program buttons

Workstation marking program module

3-52

Modules

Fig. 3-40

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

11.3 Control with digital interface


If the "Digital interface" module is active, the marking interface is
controlled via the digital interface, the buttons do not have any
function. The status of the input and output signals of the digital
interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the
marking interface.
The exact specification of communication is contained in the
document "Interface description (TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark
Series 3000/5000 marking laser devices with TruTops Mark
control software)".

11.4 QuickFlow control


If the "QuickFlow" module is active, the marking interface is
controlled with the "QuickFlow" program. In this mode the buttons
do not have any functions (also refer to the Section "Tools"
> "QuickFlow").
The QuickFlow server interprets the telegrams of QuickFlow,
executes the respective commands and generates the corresponding reply telegrams.
The exact description of the objects in QuickFlow are contained in
the separate documentation "QuickFlow Programming software for
generating visual sequential programs".

11.5 Control with serial interface


If the "Serial interface" module is active, the marking interface is
controlled via the serial interface, the buttons do not have any
function. The status of the input and output signals of the serial
interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the
marking interface.
Further information concerning the "Serial interface" software
module is contained in the document "Interface description
(TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser
devices with TruTops Mark control software)".

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Modules

3-53

11.6 Control with TCP/IP interface


If the "TCP/IP interface" module is active, the marking interface is
controlled via the TCP/IP interface, the buttons do not have any
function. The status of the input and output signals of the TCP/IP
interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the
marking interface.
Further information concerning the "TCP/IP interface" software
module is contained in the document "Interface description
(TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser
devices with TruTops Mark control software)".

11.7 Control with COM interface


If the "COM interface" module is active, the marking interface is
controlled via the COM interface, the buttons do not have any
function. The status of the input and output signals of the COM
interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the
marking interface.
Further information concerning the "COM interface" software
module is contained in the document "Interface description
(TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser
devices with TruTops Mark control software)".

3-54

Modules

SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010

Chapter 4

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

CAD ................................................................................. 4-5


Introduction ...................................................................... 4-5
Marking program.............................................................. 4-6
Starting CAD.................................................................... 4-6
User interface of CAD...................................................... 4-7
User interface of CAD with Multihead............................ 4-13

2.
2.1
2.2

Working with CAD ....................................................... 4-14


Drawing an object .......................................................... 4-14
Change objects.............................................................. 4-17

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9

File menu ...................................................................... 4-22


> New............................................................................. 4-22
> Open ........................................................................... 4-22
> Close........................................................................... 4-23
> Save............................................................................ 4-23
> Print ............................................................................ 4-23
> Print preview ............................................................... 4-24
> Printer setup ............................................................... 4-25
> Print section ................................................................ 4-25
> Send ........................................................................... 4-27

CAD

4-1

4-2

3.10

> Exit.............................................................................. 4-27

4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12

Edit menu ..................................................................... 4-28


> Undo ........................................................................... 4-28
> Repeat ........................................................................ 4-29
> Cut .............................................................................. 4-29
> Copy ........................................................................... 4-29
> Paste........................................................................... 4-29
> Delete ......................................................................... 4-29
> Modify ......................................................................... 4-30
> Properties ................................................................... 4-42
> Import file .................................................................... 4-45
> Export DXF/DWG ....................................................... 4-48
> Remove double line.................................................... 4-49
> Create polyline............................................................ 4-49

5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9

View menu .................................................................... 4-50


> Status bar ................................................................... 4-50
> Tool bars..................................................................... 4-51
> Entire page ................................................................. 4-54
> Entire drawing............................................................. 4-54
> Selection ..................................................................... 4-54
> Last view..................................................................... 4-54
> Named sections .......................................................... 4-55
> Refresh ....................................................................... 4-56
> Only thin lines ............................................................. 4-56

6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13

Draw menu ................................................................... 4-57


> Line ............................................................................. 4-60
> Rectangle.................................................................... 4-64
> Circle........................................................................... 4-66
> Arc of a circle .............................................................. 4-69
> Polyline ....................................................................... 4-73
> Ellipse ......................................................................... 4-76
> Arc of an ellipse .......................................................... 4-77
> Bitmap......................................................................... 4-78
> Dimensioning .............................................................. 4-81
> Hatching...................................................................... 4-83
> Point............................................................................ 4-83
> Tools ........................................................................... 4-84
> Data object.................................................................. 4-88

7.
7.1
7.2
7.3

Laser menu................................................................. 4-105


> Print project............................................................... 4-106
> Export project data as XML file................................. 4-108
> Laser parameters...................................................... 4-108

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16

> Marking field ............................................................. 4-136


> Sort ........................................................................... 4-148
> Generate object matrix ............................................. 4-151
> Variables................................................................... 4-153
> Hatch styles .............................................................. 4-158
> Font Editor ................................................................ 4-159
> Sort segments........................................................... 4-160
> Project data............................................................... 4-161
> Pilot laser on/off ........................................................ 4-162
> Marking ..................................................................... 4-162
> Navigator .................................................................. 4-163
> Focus test ................................................................. 4-163
> Slow hatch as area ................................................... 4-164

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

Font Editor.................................................................. 4-165


File menu ..................................................................... 4-168
Edit menu..................................................................... 4-181
View menu ................................................................... 4-182
Font menu.................................................................... 4-187
Help.............................................................................. 4-201

9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

Tools menu................................................................. 4-201


> Layers ....................................................................... 4-202
> Measurement type .................................................... 4-205
> Colors ....................................................................... 4-209
> Grid ........................................................................... 4-210
> Grid active................................................................. 4-212
> Orthogonal mode...................................................... 4-212
> Jump mode ............................................................... 4-213
> Jump to points of intersection................................... 4-213
> Options ..................................................................... 4-214

10.

Window menu ............................................................ 4-230

11.
11.1
11.2

Menu ? (Help) ............................................................. 4-230


> Index ......................................................................... 4-230
> Copyright .................................................................. 4-230

CAD

4-3

4-4

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

1.

CAD

1.1

Introduction

CAD is the graphic editor of the TruTops Mark software. With


CAD (CAD = Computer Aided Design) you can create drawings
which can be marked with the TruTops Mark software.
CAD is a vector-oriented 2-D drawing program program in which
you can create a drawing with geometric objects such as lines, rectangles, circles and ellipses or modify existing drawings.
In addition it permits the creation of text elements and barcodes as
well as the integration of bitmaps. The import function can be used
to import external data (e.g. in HPGL, IGES or DXF format).
The graphic editor is also used to define the laser parameters and
the marking sequence of the individual elements.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

CAD

4-5

1.2

Marking program

Drawings that are generated with the CAD are saved as marking
programs. Marking programs are programs which contain the
necessary information on the form, sequence and type of marking
of a workpiece.

Example of a marking program

1.3

Fig. 4-1

Starting CAD

Press the <F10> function key or click the "F10 CAD" button in the
start screen of the TruTops Mark software with the left mouse
button to start CAD.

4-6

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

1.4

User interface of CAD

The user interface of CAD comprises the drawing field (1), the
menu bar (2), the tool bar (3), the ruler bars (4) and the status line
(5).

1 Drawing field

4 Ruler bar

2 Menu bar

5 Status line

3 Tool bars
User interface CAD

Drawing field

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Fig. 4-2

The drawing field shows the area within which the laser can mark.
Drawings are created in this area. The size of the drawing field
depends on the selected optics (refer to Section 7.4 "Marking
field").

CAD

4-7

Menu bar

Menu bar

Fig. 4-3

The pull-down menus can be opened from the menu bar and used
to manage work with the CAD. The following menus are provided:

File

Edit

View

Draw

Laser

Tools

Window

(?) Help

These menus are available for accessing all functions of CAD.


Some of these functions can also be activated with buttons from
the tool bar.
The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or with the
keyboard.
Activation with the mouse

Activation with the keyboard

4-8

Click the respective menu in the menu bar. The corresponding


pull-down menu opens.

Select the respective function in the pull-down menu.

Press the keys <Alt + Hotkey>.


The corresponding pull-down menu opens.
<Hotkey> is the key with the character which is underlined in the
menu.

Example: File: <Hotkey> is key <F>.

Press the Hotkey of the required function in the pull-down


menu
or

move the marking bar with the arrow keys in the menu to the
function and press Enter.

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tool bar

The tool bar comprises five functional areas:

File bar (1)

Section bar (2)

Jump bar (3)

Actions bar (4)

Draw bar (5)

1 File bar

5 Draw bar

2 Section bar (zoom function)

6 Laser parameter administration

3 Jump bar

7 Level management

4 Actions bar

8 From left to right (8.1 to 8.8)

8.1 Select ojects with same layer

8.2 Sort

8.3 Define variable

8.4 Navigator

8.5 Focus test

8.6 Show hatch as area

8.7 Pilot laser on/off

8.8 Mark
Tool bar

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

CAD

Fig. 4-4

4-9

File tool bar

File bar

Fig. 4-5

Several menu entries from the "File" and "Edit" menus are shown
in this area of the tool bar.
Section tool bar

Section bar (zoom function)

Fig. 4-6

In this area of the tool bar the functions are displayed as buttons
which directly affect the section of the representation:

Selection

Entire page

Entire drawing

Last view

Named section

Refresh

Only thin lines

Jump tool bar

Jump bar

Fig. 4-7

In this area of the tool bar the functions are displayed as buttons
which directly affect the entered coordinates:

4-10

Grid

Orthogonal mode

Jump

Points of intersection

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Actions tool bar

Actions bar

Fig. 4-8

The functions which refer directly to an action are displayed in this


area of the tool bar as buttons. The buttons on this tool bar change
dynamically with respect to the action.
Note
The individual areas of the tool bar can be moved to any position
on the user interface. To this purpose click the surrounding frame,
hold the left mouse button down, pull the bar to the required position and release the mouse button.
Note
In the menu "View" > "Tool bars" you can show or hide the individual areas of the tool bar.
Draw tool bar

Draw bar

Fig. 4-9

Several of the drawing functions of the "Draw" menu are displayed


in this area of the tool bar as buttons.
Marking / origin coordinate system

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Line

Rectangle

Circle

Circular arc

Polyline

Ellipse

Elliptical arc

Point

Variable data object

Bitmap

Tools

Hatching

Dimensioning

CAD

4-11

Ruler bars

Ruler bar (section)

Fig. 4-10

The ruler bars to the left and above the drawing field state the
reference point and the size of the drawing field. The ruler bars
assist you in positioning the drawings in the drawing field and in
measuring the size of the drawn objects. These are automatically
displayed when the TruTops Mark CAD is opened.
Red lines in the bar show the current position of the mouse pointer.
The exact position of the mouse pointer is also shown in the right
bottom corner of the Editor as an XY coordinate.
Note
In the menu "View" > "Tool bars" > "Ruler" you can show or hide
the individual areas of the ruler bars.
Status line

Status line

Fig. 4-11

The status line comprises three sections:

4-12

Information text: A context-related text which describes the


next action which is specified or possible.

Zoom slide control: The current zoom section can be changed


with a zoom slide control; the factor is shown next to the slide
control, the factor is displayed to the right of the control slide, it
extends from 1 to 1000. If the drawing extends outside the
marking field, the factor can be below 1.

Coordinate display: Shows the current mouse pointer position


as coordinates.

CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

1.5

User interface of CAD with Multihead

The user interface of CAD for the Multihead system consists of a


divided drawing field. The white field on the left is assigned to head
A. The gray field on the right is assigned to head B.

User interface CAD with Multihead

Drawing field

Fig. 4-12

The white drawing area (master) is supplemented by the display


part for the second marking head. The design of the gray field for
head B does not allow any objects to be drawn there. This area is
only used to display the second marking head. All objects,
including those only output with the second marking head, are
drawn in the drawing area of the first marking head. Only those
objects are displayed in gray in the marking field of head B which
are also output with this head. Depending on the configuration, the
marking fields may overlap. Head "A" or "B" can makes marks in
the overlapping area.
Note
The maximum overlapping area is specified by the distance
between scanner heads A and B and defined in the TruTops Mark
configuration. The marking field for the second head is not
displayed if this value is 0.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

CAD

4-13

2.

Working with CAD

2.1

Drawing an object

CAD works with geometric objects. These can be used to create


more complex structures. Each object contains a number of
attributes (level, line type etc.) which affect its appearance.
The following example shows how to draw a rectangle as such an
object.
There are basically two possibilities to draw an object, in this case
a rectangle:

with the "Draw" menu

from the "Tool bar"

Draw menu

"Draw" menu

Fig. 4-13

In the "Draw" menu select the item "Rectangle". A field appears with a list containing the available construction methods.

Select one of the methods by clicking the item, for example


"two diagonal points". A check mark appears in front of the
active method.

or

4-14

Working with CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tool bar

Click the "Rectangle" button in the "Draw" tool bar.

Click the "Rectangle" button in the "Action" tool bar. Two diagonal points".

Note
If the mouse pointer is positioned over a button for several
seconds, an explanatory text appears.
Information on which button it is can be seen in the status line at
the bottom left.

Move the mouse pointer over the drawing field.


The mouse pointer changes shape.

Click on any point in the drawing field and move the mouse
pointer.
A rectangle appears.

Click the second point.


The program creates a rectangle between both diagonal
points.

Drawing a rectangle

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Working with CAD

Fig. 4-14

4-15

The diagonal points can also be entered numerically.

To this purpose activate the construction method as shown


above "Rectangle: two diagonal points" either with the "Draw"
menu or the "Tool bar".

Move the mouse pointer to the "Action" tool bar, which


changed when the function was activated.

Enter the required X and Y position for the first diagonal point.
Click the scroll-down button to open the entry field for the
second diagonal point.

Enter the required values.


When the scroll-down button is clicked again the "Angle" entry
field appears.

Enter an angle value if the rectangle is not to be positioned


parallel to the edges of the drawing area.

Confirm your entries by clicking the "OK" button or by pressing


<Enter>.

Note
Click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in which all
entry fields of the function appear.
The object is then part of the drawing. It is inactive and must be
activated if it has to be changed.

4-16

Working with CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

2.2

Change objects

In the basic position of CAD all objects of the drawing can be


selected by clicking (picking) to change them further.
When the mouse pointer moves onto an object that can be
selected, it changes shape.

Click with the left mouse button to select the respective object.

It is then surrounded by a dotted frame and can be modified.


Select (frame)

If several objects are to be selected, a frame can be drawn over


the objects.

Position the mouse pointer, hold the left mouse button down,
pull the frame over the selected objects and release the mouse
pointer. All objects which are contained completely within the
frame are then selected.

Note
When you hold down the <Shift> key all objects are picked which
are even only touched by the frame.
Select (accumulate)

Several objects can be selected one after the other

Moving and copying objects

Hold down the <Ctrl> or <Strg> key and click with the left
mouse button on the objects you wish to pick. Every time a
new object is selected, the previously selected objects remain
active.

Inside the area of selected objects, the mouse pointer changes


form and becomes a drag tool.

Move the mouse pointer into the area of the selected objects,
keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the objects into
the required position.

Note
If the <Ctrl> or <Strg> key is pressed previously, a copy of the
object is shifted.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Working with CAD

4-17

Automatic scrolling

If selected objects are to be dragged into a drawing area, which is


not visible on the screen, automatic scrolling of the drawing can be
initiated.

Move the mouse pointer to the edge (depending on the


required scroll direction to the left, right, up or down) so that
the shifting cursor is near the edge of the drawing and scrolling
then starts in the respective direction.

Scrolling can also be initiated with the arrow keys.


Note
If the center button is activated on your mouse driver, it is possible
to move the view in a zoom stage by pressing the center button
and by moving the viewed area.
Modifying objects

Selected objects can be modified in many ways.


They can be:
aligned in various ways

subjected to geometric operations (shifting, rotating, scaling,


mirroring)

adapted to existing drawing elements by shifting, stretching,


flattening or distorting with the "Adjust" function.

automatically generated several times with grid or circular


duplication

archived as icons in a library.

These modifications are normally possible in different ways:

4-18

From the "Edit" menu (details in Section 4 "Edit menu")

From the "Action" menu (details in Section 1.4 "User interface


of CAD" > "Tool bar" and "Draw object tool bar")

From the context menu.

Working with CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Context menu

If one or more objects have been picked, the context menu can be
opened which contains the main editing functions.

Move the mouse pointer into the area of the selected object(s).

Click the right mouse button. The context menu appears.

Context menu

Fig. 4-15

The following actions can be performed in the context menu:


> Activate
Activates the transforming mode. This function can be used to
modify the shape of objects, depending on their type, in various
ways.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Working with CAD

4-19

> Modify
Opens a list containing all modification options of the "Edit" menu
such as alignment, shifting, rotating, scaling etc. Details on these
functions are contained in the Section "Edit menu" > "Modify".
> Delete
The selceted object(s) will be deleted.
Note
Marked objects can also be deleted by pressing the <Del> key.
> Properties
Depending on the object type a properties window is opened in
which the various settings can be made. Details are contained in
Section 4.8 "Properties".
> Group
The picked objects are combined to a block. This block is automatically given a specific name which can be found in the
"Properties" window (see above).
> Select subset
A subset of the picked objects can be selected. This can for
example be important if two lines are on top of one another and it
is not otherwise possible to specify which line is meant.
> Upwards
Currently not available.
> Downwards
Currently not available.
> Dissolve
A block object has been picked. With the "Dissolve" function it is
broken up into its individual elements. These individual elements
can then also be picked. This also applies if hatching or a dimension has been selected.
> Fill out
Picked objects can be filled out with this function. Details are
contained in the Sections "Laser menu" and "Extras menu > "Hatch
styles".

4-20

Working with CAD

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

During the step > Marking laser light is emitted from


the lens.
WARNING

Laser light can burn your skin and cause permanent damage
to your eyes.

If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear


laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser light.

Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece.

Never look into the lens.

> Marking
Initiates a quick output of the existing drawing to the marking device for test purposes.
If no object has been selected in the drawing, the entire drawing is
marked. If objects have been selected, only these are output.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Working with CAD

4-21

3.

File menu

The "File" menu contains commands for file handling.

File menu

3.1

Fig. 4-16

> New

This function creates a new marking program. "CAD


[LaserCAD1]" appears in the title of the user interface. The size of
the marking field depends on the presetting in the menu "Laser" >
"Marking field" > "Optic". The window of an already open drawing
is placed in the background.

3.2

> Open

This function is used to open an existing marking program.


A dialog window opens from which the required file can be
selected.

4-22

File menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

3.3

> Close

This function closes the active drawing.


If it has not been saved, a prompt appears asking whether you
would like to do so.

Click "Yes" to save the drawing.

In the dialog window select "Save as" to enter the place where
you wish to save the file, enter a name and then click the
"Save" button to complete the procedure.

If this file which has been modified has already been saved, a
prompt appears asking whether the changes should be saved.
Click "Yes" to save the drawing.

3.4

> Save

This function saves the changes in the current marking program. If


the program has not yet been saved, a dialog window "Save as"
appears automatically.

Select the respective place you wish to save the file, enter a
name and then click the "Save" button to complete the
procedure.

3.5

> Print

The program can be printed out on a connected printer for


documentation purposes. Click this button to open the print dialog
of your printer. If the printable area is smaller than the drawing
size, the print-out is spread over several pages (from left to right,
from top to bottom). These pages contain the entire drawing when
put together.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

File menu

4-23

3.6

> Print preview

With the "Print preview" function you can see how the drawing will
be output on the printer. When "Print preview" is selected, a
window opens in which the section can be zoomed. If this is output
on several printed pages you can scroll through the individual
pages.
It is also possible to print directly from the print preview.

Click the "Close" button to close the print preview.

Print preview

4-24

File menu

Fig. 4-17

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

3.7

> Printer setup

With this function you return to the setup dialog of a printer on


which the printout is to be made. The user has the possibility to
select a printer previously installed under Windows and to make
settings such as the paper format and printing direction.

3.8

> Print section

This function opens a print dialog which features several options


for printing the open drawing.
Print section

"Print section" dialog window

Fig. 4-18

Option Entire drawing, format filling


The drawing (not the drawing field) is printed as large as possible
onto the paper format provided. The necessary scale is displayed
under Scale 1:xxx.

Option Current picture section, format filling


The set picture section is printed so that the format is filled. The
page aspect ratio is adapted so that none of the details of the
picture section is omitted. The printed area is therefore larger than
shown on the screen.
The selection "Current picture section, format filling" refers to the
section shown in the dialog for section "Print". At the beginning this
section is identical with the current view of the drawing. After a
zoom action within the dialog, however, the section shown in the
dialog changes.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

File menu

4-25

Option Fixed scale


This function permits the entry of a fixed scale. A frame appears on
the drawing in the representation window which symbolizes the
paper size. This frame can be clicked and moved as required on
the drawing in order to print any section of the drawing in the set
scale.
Paper size
Shows the currently set paper size in the menu "Printer" > "Printer
setup" on which the views and scale calculations in this dialog are
based.
Button Printer setup
Opens the print dialog in which the printer settings can be made.
Number
Permits the entry of the number of copies to be printed.
Button Overview
The entire drawing is shown in the representation window. The
print section shown in the rectangle can be moved on the drawing
within this picked rectangle as required.
Button Paper
The active paper area is displayed. The paper area shown in the
rectangle can be moved on the drawing within this picked rectangle
as required while holding down the mouse button.
Button Zoom
Any section of the drawing can be selected for display by pulling a
rectangle while holding down the mouse button. The print area can
then be moved anywhere on the drawing while holding the mouse
button down within the picked frame.
Button Print
Starts printing.
Button Cancel
Closes the dialog box without starting the printing job.

4-26

File menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

3.9

> Send

This function accesses the Windows mail system.

3.10 > Exit


Concludes work with the CAD program. If the current drawing has
been changed, a prompt appears asking whether the changes in
the file should be saved.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

File menu

4-27

4.

Edit menu

Edit menu

Fig. 4-19

In addition to familiar functions such as "Undo", "Restore", "Copy"


etc. this menu contains further functions with which you can modify
drawing elements. Import and export functions for files with other
data formats can be used.

4.1

> Undo

Undoes the last change in the drawing. The last ten actions can be
undone in succession.

4-28

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

4.2

> Repeat

Permits restoration of the previous condition if the last change(s)


have been undone. The last undone ten actions can be restored in
succession.

4.3

> Cut

The selected objects of the drawings are deleted from the drawing
(cut out) and pasted to the clipboard. They are contained on the
clipboard in CAD format. Parts of the drawing can therefore be
transferred to another drawing or another program.

4.4

> Copy

The selected objects are copied and transferred to the clipboard.


They are contained on the clipboard in CAD format. Parts of the
drawing can therefore be transferred to another drawing or another
program.

4.5

> Paste

The content of the clipboard is pasted to the drawing if it is


contained there in CAD format or as a bitmap. In this way parts of
the drawing of other CAD drawings or other programs can be
pasted into an existing drawing.
Note
Objects in CAD format are inserted without enquiry in accordance
with their global coordinates. If the source document has a different
paper size, the pasted objects could possibly be located outside or
exceed the page of the target document.

4.6

> Delete

The selected objects of the drawing are deleted from the drawin.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-29

4.7

> Modify

> Left-justified
This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all lefthand limits of the objects align with the left-hand limits of the object
which was last selected.
> Centered horizontal
This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all center
lines of the objects are aligned with the center line of the object
which was last selected.
> Right-justified
This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all righthand limits of the objects align with the right-hand limits of the
object which was last selected.
> Top justified
This function moves selected objects vertically so that all top limits
of the objects align with the top limits of the object which was last
selected.
> Centered vertical
This function moves selected objects vertically so that all vertical
center lines of the objects are aligned with the vertical center line of
the object which was last selected.
> Bottom justified
This function moves selected objects vertically so that all bottom
limits of the objects align with the bottom limits of the object which
was last selected.
> Horizontally centered
This function moves selected objects horizontally so that the righthand and left-hand distance of all objects to the edge of the page is
the same.
> Vertically centered
This function moves selected objects vertically so that the top and
bottom distance of all objects to the edge of the page is the same.

4-30

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Equal vertical distance


This function moves three or more selected objects vertically so
that the vertical distance between the objects is the same.
> Equal horizontal distance
This function moves three or more selected objects horizontally so
that the horizontal distance between the objects is the same.
> Equal width
This function changes the width of the selected objects so that the
width of the objects aligns with the width of the object which was
last selected.
> Equal height
This function changes the height of the selected objects so that the
height of the objects aligns with the height of the object which was
last selected.
> Shift
This function can be used to shift objects after entering a start and
target position in the drawing field.

To this purpose click a starting point in the drawing field with


the mouse button after selecting the function.

Move the mouse pointer to the required target point.


A dotted line appears with an arrow at the end.

Click the target point with the mouse button.


The selected objects are shifted to the target point.

The offset can also be entered in the "Action" tool bar, which
changes when this function is activated.

"Action" offset tool bar

Fig. 4-20

Enter the required X and Y offset values into both fields next to
"Offset".
The shift is initiated by clicking the red OK button or by
pressing the <Enter> key.

Note
When the start and target points are given, the respective set jump
characteristics are taken into account.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-31

> Rotate
Selected objects can be rotated as required with this function.

After selecting the function first enter a fixed point by clicking


with the mouse button around which rotation should be
performed.

Move the mouse pointer away from the fixed point.


A dotted circle appears.

Click again to enter a start point and an end point for rotation.
The selected objects are rotated.

The fixed point and the rotation angle can also be entered in the
"Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated.
Only the input boxes for "Reference" appear in the tool bar
When the scroll-down button is clicked, the "Angle" entry field
appears. You can also click the "down arrow" button to open a
dialog window in which both fields appear.

"Action" fixed point/angle tool bar

Fig. 4-21

Enter the required X and Y values of the fixed point into both
fields next to "Fixed point".

Enter the required angle. You can also specify whether a copy
of the selected elements is to be created and rotated, or the
originals themselves.

Rotation is initiated by clicking the red OK button.

4-32

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Scaling
Selected objects can be scaled as required with this function.

After selecting the function first enter a fixed point by clicking


with the mouse button around which scaling should be
performed.

Move the mouse pointer away from the fixed point. A dotted
rectangle appears.

Click again to enter a start point and an end point for scaling.
The selected objects are scaled.

The fixed point and the degree of scaling can also be entered in
the "Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated.
Only the input boxes for "Fixed point" appear in the tool bar. By
clicking on the scroll down button, further input boxes appear. You
can also click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in
which both fields appear.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-33

Scale marked objects

"Scale marked objects" dialog field

Fig. 4-22

Enter the required X and Y values of the fixed point into both
fields next to "Fixed point".

Enter the required scale factor. You can also specify whether a
copy of the selected elements is to be created and scaled, or
the originals themselves.

or

You enter the width and height in the respective boxes.

Scaling is initiated by clicking the red OK button.

4-34

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Mirroring
Selected objects can be mirrored with this function.
When this function is activated, the selected objects are first
horizontally mirrored on an axis through their geometric center
point. If the mouse pointer is moved on any line of the objects, this
is regarded as a mirror axis.

In the "Action" tool bar check the box "Copy" if you wish to
mirror a copy of the selected objects.

Mirroring tool bar

Fig. 4-23

Mirroring is initiated by clicking with the left-hand mouse button,


pressing "Enter" or by clicking the "OK" button in the "Action" tool
bar.

Mirrored rectangle

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

Fig. 4-24

4-35

> Adjust
This function can be used to adjust marked objects to up to three
pairs of points.

After selecting the function first enter the first point by clicking
with the mouse button from which adjustment should be
performed.

Move the mouse pointer away from the point. A line appears
with an arrow at the tip.

Enter the first target point by clicking again.

Repeat a second and third time if necessary. Click "OK" with


the mouse button or press Enter to initiate adjustment.

The start points and fixed points can also be entered in the "Action"
tool bar, which changes when this function is activated. Only the
entry fields for the first start point are visible in the tool bar.
When the scroll-down button is clicked the "1st Target point" entry
field appears. You can also click the "down arrow" button to open a
dialog window in which all fields appear.

4-36

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Adjust marked objects

"Adjust marked objects" dialog field

Fig. 4-25

Enter the required X and Y values of the first start point into
both fields next to "1st Start point".

Enter the required X and Y values of the first target point into
both fields next to "1st Target point".

Repeat these entries if required for the second and third


target point.
You can also specify whether a copy of the selected elements are
to be adjusted, or the originals themselves.
Adjustment is initiated by clicking the red OK button or by pressing
the Enter key.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-37

> Copy grid-like


This function is used to copy marked objects either linearly next to
one another or in a grid-like manner next to and above one
another.
When the function has been selected, a dialog window opens in
which the currently set copy pattern is displayed. The selected
objects are displayed with a gray background. The required
settings can be performed in this dialog window.
Reproduce (matrix)

"Reproduce (grid-like)" dialog window

Fig. 4-26

Select "Represent drawing"


When this check box has been checked, the surrounding, nonselected drawing is also displayed alongside the grid pattern of the
currently marked objects.
Button Overview
When this button has been activated not only the current section
but the entire drawing is displayed.
Option Chessboard-like
Reproduction is performed in a chessboard manner, in both
horizontal and vertical directions.

4-38

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Linear
Reproduction is performed linearly, i.e. only in one direction.
Angle of rotation
An angle of rotation for the arrangement of the reproduced objects
can be entered.
Horizontal distance
The horizontal distances of the individual grid elements are
selected so that they can be arranged next to one another without
spacing. If the value here is lowered, overlapping occurs, if it is
increased, larger spaces result.
Vertical distance
The vertical distances of the individual grid elements are selected
so that they can be arranged next to one another without spacing.
If the value here is lowered, overlapping occurs, if it is increased,
larger spaces result.
Number horizontal
The number of grid elements in a horizontal direction. The result of
the current setting is displayed in the window. Another reference
element can be selected by clicking an object in the representation
window.
Number vertical
The number of grid elements in a vertical direction. The result of
the current setting is displayed in the window. Another reference
element can be selected by clicking an object in the representation
window.
Click "OK" or press the Enter key to start reproduction. Click
"Cancel" or press the <Esc> key to terminate the process.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-39

> Copy circularly


Marked objects can be copied circularly with this function.
When the function has been selected, a dialog window opens in
which the currently set reproduction pattern can be displayed. The
selected objects are displayed with a gray background. The required settings can be performed in this dialog window.
Reproduce (circularly)

"Reproduce (circularly)" dialog window

Fig. 4-27

Select "Rotate objects"


When this check box has been checked, the marked objects are
rotated by an entered angle for circular reproduction.
Center
Entry of the center point for circular reproduction. Alternatively the
center point can also be defined by clicking the mouse in the
window.

4-40

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Number
Entry of the number of copies of the marked objects. These are
regularly arranged around the set center point.
Option Full circle
If the option field "Full circle" is selected, the marked objects can
be reproduced in a full circle.
Option Angle step
If the "Angle step" option is selected and the ckeck box "Rotate
objects" is checked, the objects are rotated by the entered angle.
Select "Represent drawing"
When this box has been checked, the surrounding, non-selected
drawing is also displayed as well as the grid pattern of the currently
marked objects.
Button Overview
When this button has been activated, not only the current section
but the entire drawing is displayed.
Click "OK" or press the Enter key to start reproduction. Click
"Cancel" or press the <Esc> key to terminate the process.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-41

4.8

> Properties

This function shows the properties of marked objects. When this


function is activated, a dialog window opens in which the various
properties of the marked objects are displayed and can be
modified.
Card Rectangle
Modify properties

"Modify rectangle properties" dialog window

Fig. 4-28

Depending on the type of the marked object(s), properties such as


start and end points, length, width, height etc. can be modified.
Card Layer

"Properties - Layer" dialog window

Fig. 4-29

Each object is on a defined level. With this mechanism drawing


elements (dimensions, auxiliary lines, lettering etc.) can be shown
and hidden which ensures enhanced clarity.

4-42

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

The layers are managed on the basis of their names. The list field
shows the currently available layers. A layer is selected by clicking
a name. Background and CenterLines have the same name in all
languages.
Button New
When this function is activated, a dialog window opens in which a
new layer can be created.
Define new layer

"Define new layer" dialog window

Fig. 4-30

Details on the definition and for properties of layers are given in the
Section "Extras menu" > "Layers".

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-43

Card Laser
Here, the marked object can be assigned the appropriate laser
parameters.

"Properties - Laser" dialog window

Fig. 4-31

Details on the laser parameters can be found in Section 7.3 "Laser


parameter".

4-44

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

4.9

> Import file

This function is used to import files in the formats 'HPGL', 'IGES',


'DXF/DWG', 'PCR' and 'VLF'.

Edit menu

Fig. 4-32

When this function has been activated, a dialog window appears in


which the required files can be found, selected and imported.
Note
AutoCAD DXF files: *.DWG can be imported up to the 2006 or any
former AutoCAD version.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-45

Import HPGL file

Edit menu Import HPGL file

Fig. 4-33

The file is converted into CAD format and the geometric order
(Quadtree) is calculated to permit fast access to the individual
objects.
A dialog window appears in which the scale and the allocation are
entered.

4-46

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Import scale allocation

"Import scale allocation" dialog window

Fig. 4-34

Scale
Entry of the required scale. The exact scale which depicts the file
to be imported with format filling on the drawing area is given in the
field behind "(optimum: xxx:yyy)".
Horizontal position
The imported file is pasted into the drawing area with either leftjustified, horizontal central or right-justified positioning or by
entering the absolute position in the drawing area; the absolute
position permits entry of an offset (refer to "Absolute position").

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-47

Vertical position
The imported file is pasted into the drawing area flush with either
the bottom edge, vertical centered, or by entering the absolute
position in the drawing area; the absolute position permits entry of
an offset (refer to "Absolute position").
Absolute position
The imported file is pasted into the drawing area with the absolute
X or Y coordinates of this file with the offset defined in this field.
Laser parameter allocation
Here the line types of the file to be imported (left-hand list) and the
defined laser parameters of the project (right-hand list) are
allocated. Details on laser parameters are contained in the Section
"Laser menu" > "Laser parameters".
Font assignment
Here the character sets of the file to be imported (left-hand list) and
the defined character sets of the project (right-hand list) are
allocated. Details on character sets are contained in the Section
"Laser menu" > "Font Editor".
Vector minimum length
In order to prevent division into too many vectors with very short
lengths, a minimum length can be set; shorter vectors are combined to this minimum length.
Select "Close automatic"
All non-linked lines of the imported file are closed.

4.10 > Export DXF/DWG


CAD files: *.dxf (Drawing Interchange Format) or
AutoCAD DXF files: *.dwg can be exported with "Menu > Edit >
Export DXF/DWG file".

4-48

Edit menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

4.11 > Remove double line


If you find on closer inspection that a line consists of a double line,
you can remove it.
Mark the double line and select "Menu > Edit > Remove double
line". The following dialog window opens:

View menu

Fig. 4-35

Confirm with OK. Now there will only be one line.

4.12 > Create polyline


If, for example, you have created a rectangle which consists of 4
single lines, the 4 single lines can be changed into a polyline by
encompassing the lines with a frame and trigger the function with
"Menu > Edit > Create polyline". The 4 single lines are now
combined in a polyline and the color of the line changes to red.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Edit menu

4-49

5.

View menu

View menu

Fig. 4-36

With the "View" menu the user interface of CAD can be


customized.

5.1

> Status bar

Here it can be selected whether the status bar is displayed at the


bottom of the screen or not (details are contained in Section 1.4,
User interface of CAD).

Status bar

4-50

View menu

Fig. 4-37

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

5.2

> Tool bars

The tool bars serve for fast access to important functions of CAD.
They can be activated or deactivated here.
Note
Activated functions are indicated by a checkmark.
Tool bars can be moved by clicking the surrounding frame and
pulling it to any required location. If a tool bar is moved to the edge
of the drawing area, its orientation (horizontal/vertical) can change
and it can take up position at the edge of the drawing area.
> File
Shows the menu items from the "File", "Edit" and "Help" as a tool
bar.

File tool bar

Fig. 4-38

> Jump
Shows the functions which directly influence the coordinate entry
(grid, orthogonal mode, jump, jump/intersection points) as a tool
bar.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Jump tool bar

Fig. 4-39

View menu

4-51

> Actions
Shows the functions which refer directly to actions (e.g. alignment,
shifting, duplication of objects) as a tool bar.
Note
This tool bar changes dynamically depending on the action.

1 Construction types
2 Entry field
"Action" tool bar

3 Input control
4 Construction control
Fig. 4-40

This tool bar also permits exact numeric entries during the creation
of objects. It is therefore advisable to always switch this tool bar
on. Details on this can be found in Section 1.4 "User interface of
CAD " > "Tool bar" and 2.1 "Draw object, Tool bar".
Construction types

Displays the different construction options of an object, depending


on the object type.
For example if a line has to be drawn, the construction options "two
points, point, length, angle, tangent from point to circle" etc. can be
selected.
When another object type is selected, this tool bar area changes in
accordance with the construction options of the new object type.

Entry field

4-52

Permits entry of the individual features (start point, length, angle).


The entry field switches over accordingly.

View menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Input control

Controls the entry of the construction features.


The small arrow keys can be used to switch between the different
entry fields (e.g. start point or length/angle).
The large arrow opens a new window in which all features of the
respective construction are listed at the same time.
Note
This window can be shifted as required and remains as a basic
setting for further construction.

Construction control

Permits switchover between various construction types.


Note
Switchover is also possible with the <PageUp>-/<PageDown>
keys.
Construction is also concluded by clicking the button with the red
checkmark.
> Section
Shows the functions which directly affect the view section
("Selection", "Entire page", "Entire drawing", "Last view", "Named
sections", "Refresh", "Only thin lines") as a tool bar.

Section tool bar

Fig. 4-41

> Ruler
A ruler appears to the left and above the drawing area which takes
the reference point and the scale of the drawing into account. The
mouse pointer position is marked with colored lines on the ruler.
The marks on the ruler have been selected so that the divisions
are easily legible.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

View menu

4-53

5.3

> Entire page

Displays the entire page in the defined marking field size.


The area outside the defined marking field size is shown in another
color.

5.4

> Entire drawing

Full screen display of the entire drawing.

5.5

> Selection

When this function is activated, a drawing area can be opened with


the mouse pointer with full-screen display.

5.6

> Last view

Shows the last selected zoom section.


If, for example, you have enlarged a section to view a detail, you
can return to the higher-level display with this function.

4-54

View menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

5.7

> Named sections

Permits the naming of zoomed sections which can then be opened


by their name (further information by clicking the respective field).
> Named sections

"Named sections" dialog window

Fig. 4-42

Representation window
Represents the named sections.
In the "Designation" field you can enter the name for the new
section or change it by clicking the existing name. The displayed
coordinates (under "from left", "from right", "from top", "from
bottom") are the limitations of the respective section.
Button Create tiles
Divides the entire drawing area into equal sections (tiles).
You can select the horizontal and vertical number and the
designation; with "Create tiles" the named zoomed sections are
then automatically created and entered into the list.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

View menu

4-55

Button Represent
The section currently selected in the representation window is
shown.
Button Close
Closes the dialog window.
Button Current section
Enters the currently selected zoom section into the list of the
representation window. You have to enter a name.
Button Remove
Removes the section selected in the representation window from
the list.

5.8

> Refresh

Refreshes the current section of the drawing area.


During intensive drawing, gaps and small pixel errors can occur in
the screen representation. When this function has been activated,
the section can be newly represented without faults.

5.9

> Only thin lines

Shows all lines of the drawn object independently of the definition


of the line thickness (this corresponds to the set width in the "Laser
parameters" menu, refer to Section 7.3 "Laser parameters" > "Main
parameters") in the same thickness.
During zooming correctly scaled representation of lines of varying
thickness can cause confused representations. In addition thick
lines increase the image creation time.

4-56

View menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.

Draw menu

The "Draw" menu contains all construction type with which you can
create objects.
When the object type (e.g. line) has been selected, the construction type (e.g. as tangent, two points) is defined.

Draw menu

Fig. 4-43

Note
Several functions in the "Draw" menu can also be activated, with
the "Draw" tool bar by clicking the respective button.

Draw tool bar

Fig. 4-44

When the construction type has been selected, the required


features of construction are interactively entered, for example first
a coordinate (start point), then the length of the line and then the
angle.
There are two possible options for entering construction features:

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

with the mouse pointer in the drawing field,

from the keyboard by entry in the respective entry fields of the


corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be
switched on which contains all features as input fields.

Draw menu

4-57

Construction features

All constructions require the following feature entries:

Coordinates (points)

Scale sizes (length, width, height, distance)

Angles

Other drawing objects (for tangents, center vertical, parallels)

The construction is concluded by one of the following actions:

Click the mouse button

Press the <Enter> key

Click the red OK button in the "Action" tool bar

The CAD permits fast creation of identical objects in the form of


rectangles, circles and ellipses. When an object has been created
on the draw area, the features of this object have been saved and
pre-defined for the next object. A copy of the object which was last
drawn appears by clicking the right mouse button. This procedure
can be repeated as often as possible as long as the <Esc> key is
not pressed or another object selected. This function can also be
switched off, refer to Section 10.9 "Extras menu"> "Options" >
"Draw".

Enter coordinates
During the construction of new objects of the drawing, coordinates
(points) are often required. These can be entered in various ways:
Free entry

The point is determined with the mouse pointer. The coordinates


are displayed in the "Action" and "Status" tool bar.

Jumping of points

The "Jump" function is activated. When the mouse pointer comes


near a point of the drawing, it changes its form. The exact point of
the drawing can be accepted by clicking.

Jumping intersection points

The "Jump intersection points" function is activated. When the


mouse pointer comes near the intersection point of two objects, it
changes its form. The exact intersection point of the drawing can
be accepted by clicking.

Keyboard input

The coordinates can be numerically entered into the respective


entry field of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can
also be switched on which contains all features as input fields.
Enter length
During the construction of new objects of the drawing, scales
(length, width, height, distance) are often required. These can be
generated in various ways:

4-58

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Free entry

The length is calculated from the distance of the current mouse


pointer position and the respective logical reference point for the
length. This is displayed in the "Action" tool bar.

Jumping of points

The "Jump" function is activated. When the mouse pointer comes


near a point of the drawing, it changes its form. The exact point of
the drawing as a start point for the length can be accepted by
clicking. If another point of the drawing is approached and jumped,
a length can be taken exactly from the drawing.
If the length of a drawn object is required during construction, its
property can be accepted by approaching this object and clicking
with the right-hand mouse button. First a selection menu opens
from which the concrete length can be selected.

Prerequisite

Control of the right mouse button must be set in the dialog window
"Extras" > "Options" > "Draw" on the context menu for length,
angle.

Keyboard input

The length can be numerically entered into the respective entry


field of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also
be switched on which contains all features as input fields. Entered
lengths are saved as a presetting and are offered for selection the
next time a length is entered.
Entering an angle
During the construction of new objects of the drawing, angles are
often required. These can be generated in various ways.

Free entry

The angle is calculated from the connecting line between the current mouse pointer position and the respective logical reference
point. It is displayed in the "Action" tool bar.

Jumping of points

If the angle of a drawn object is required during construction, its


properties can be accepted by clicking with the right-hand mouse
button on this object. First a selection menu opens from which the
concrete angle can be selected.

Prerequisite

Control of the right mouse button must be set in the dialog window
"Extras" > "Options" > "Draw" on the context menu for length,
angle.

Keyboard input

The angle can be numerically entered into the respective entry field
of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be
switched on which contains all features as input fields.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-59

6.1

> Line

When the "Line" submenu has been selected from the "Draw"
menu, various options are available for drawing a line. The "Action"
tool bar changes correspondingly.

Line action bar

Fig. 4-45

> Two points


A line is created by clicking on a start and end point. The
coordinates of the points can also be directly entered into the
dialog window of the "Action" tool bar.
> Point, length, angle
This function requires the entry of a start point, the line length and
of the angle to the horizontal to define a line specifically.
Click a start point. The form of the mouse pointer changes to a
length symbol. Determine the length by pulling and clicking. The
form of the mouse pointer changes to an angle symbol.
Define the angle to the horizontal by pulling and clicking. Positive
angles are given in a clockwise direction.

Line, point, length, angle information

4-60

Draw menu

Fig. 4-46

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Point as tangent


When the point has been entered, approach a circle or arc. The
required line appears.
As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with
the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the "Action" tool
bar.
> Tangent
This function draws a tangent between two circles or arcs.
Select the first circle or arc and then approach the second.
With the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the
"Action" tool bar select one of the four tangent versions.
Select the required version by clicking.
> Tangent with angle
This function draws a tangent from a circle or arc with a defined
length and a defined horizontal angle.
First select the circle to which a tangent is to be created. Then determine the length and the angle.
> Mid-perpendicular
This function is used to create a center vertical to a previously
selected line.
Approach a line and select by clicking, the center vertical appears
then determine the length.
As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with
the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the "Action" tool
bar.
> Bisecting line
Creates a line as a bisecting line between two lines of the drawing.
To this purpose two lines are approached in succession. The
required bisecting line appears the length is then determined.
As there are four options, it is possible to move between these with
the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the "Action" tool
bar.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-61

> Parallel
Creates a line as a parallel to a line of the drawing at a certain
distance.
To this purpose approach a line. The required parallel appears.
Now determine the distance from this line.
As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with
the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the "Action" tool
bar.
> Parallel by point
Creates a parallel to a line the distance of which is determined by
a point which is to intersect the parallel.
To this purpose approach a line. The required parallel appears.
Now select the point which the parallel should intersect.

Parallel with point

4-62

Draw menu

Fig. 4-47

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Perpendicular
This function creates a perpendicular to an object.
Select the freely selectable start point of the line. Now select an
object to which the perpendicular is to be created.
Both a circle (arc) or a line can be selected as an object.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Perpendicular

Fig. 4-48

Draw menu

4-63

6.2

> Rectangle

After selecting the "Rectangle" submenu in the "Draw" menu, there


are three different options for drawing rectangles.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

Rectangle action bar

Fig. 4-49

> Point, width, height, angle


This function creates a rectangle by entering a corner point, the
width and height of the rectangle and the angle to the start point.
The following illustration lists the four parameters and their
sequence.

1 Point
2 Width
Rectangle: Point, width, height, angle

4-64

Draw menu

3 Height
4 Angle
Fig. 4-50

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> 1st point, 2nd point, height


This functions generates a rectangle by entering the two corner
points of the basic line and the required height.
The angle to the horizontal is determined by both first points.

1
Rectangle 1. point, 2. point, 3. height

Fig. 4-51

> Two diagonal points


This function creates a rectangle by entering two diagonal points.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-65

6.3

> Circle

After selecting the "Circle" submenu in the "Draw" menu there are
various different options for drawing circles.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

Circle action bar

Fig. 4-52

> Center point and radius


The simplest method of drawing circles is to determine the center
point and the radius.
After selecting a point the radius can be determined. This is performed either interactively by pulling the mouse or by direct entry of
the radius value in the "Radius" field in the "Action" tool bar.

4-66

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> 2 points on the circle


With this function a circle can be drawn by defining two diagonal
points.
Select the first point or its coordinates; then repeat for the second
point.
The coordinates of the second point can also be entered relatively
to the first point. To this purpose the "relative" box must be selected in the "Action" tool bar.
As shown in the following diagram, this function can be used, for
example, to place a circle around a set square. To this purpose two
opposing corner points of the rectangle are used as an entry for
determining the circle.

Circle, two points on the circle

Fig. 4-53

> Center and circle point


This function creates a circle from the center point and a point on
the circle.
Similarly as for drawing a circle with the entry of the center point
and the radius, the center point is required in this case. The radius
is, however, not entered directly, but it can serve, for example, as
an intersection point of two objects as a circle point.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-67

> From 3 points


This function creates a circle by entering three points.

Circle, from three points

Fig. 4-54

> On 3 tangents
This function creates a circle which touches the three objects of the
drawing at a tangent. These can be lines, circles or arcs.

Circle, on three tangents

Fig. 4-55

As there are several possible options for construction, it is possible


to move between these with the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or
the button of the "Action" tool bar.
> On 2 tangents and radius
This function creates a circle which touches the two objects of the
drawing at a tangent and which has a defined radius.
> Point, tangent, radius
This function is used for creating a circle which touches another
object at a tangent. First the object to be touched must be
selected, the touching point determined and finally the radius
stated.

4-68

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.4

> Arc of a circle

After selecting the "Arc of a circle" submenu in the "Draw" menu


there are various different options for drawing circle arcs.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

Arc of a circle action bar

Fig. 4-56

> Center and radius


With this function an arc of a circle is created by the entry of the
center point (1), radius (2), start and end angle (3).

Arc of a circle: 1 Center point, 2 Radius, 3 Angle

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

Fig. 4-57

4-69

> From 2 points and a radius


With this function an arc of a circle is created by the entry of two
end points (1, 2) and the radius (3).

2
3

Arc of a circle: From two points and a radius

Fig. 4-58

> Center, circle and angel point


This function is used to create an arc from the center point (1) and
two points on the arc of the circle.
The second point (2) determines the radius and the start angle of
the arc. The connecting line of the third point (3) with the center
point defines the end angle.

Arc of a circle: 1 Center point, 1 Circle, 3 Angle point

4-70

Draw menu

Fig. 4-59

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> From 3 points


This function is used to create an arc of a circle from three points
on the arc.
The first point (1) defines the start point of the circular arc; the third
point (3) defines its end point. The second point (2) lies on the
circle line.

Arc of a circle: From three points

Fig. 4-60

> On 3 tangents
This function is used to create an arc of a circle which touches
three objects of the drawing at a tangent. These can be lines,
circles or arcs.
The tangential point of the first object (1) defines the start point, the
tangential point of the third object (3) the end point of the arc.
As there are several construction options, it is possible to move
between these with the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the
button of the "Action" tool bar.

Arc of a circle: On three tangents

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

Fig. 4-61

4-71

> On 2 tangents and radius


This function creates an arc of a circle which touches the two
objects (1, 2) of the drawing at a tangent and which has a defined
radius (3). The objects to be touched can be lines, circles or arcs.
As there are several construction options, it is possible to move
between these with the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar.

Arc of a circle: On two tangents and radius

4-72

Draw menu

Fig. 4-62

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.5

> Polyline

After selecting the "Polyline" submenu in the "Draw" menu a polyline can be drawn.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
A polyline is comprised of several individual lines or arcs of a
circle. The start point is defined by clicking the left mouse button.
Additional points are added in the same manner.
The end point is determined by clicking the right mouse button or
by pressing <Enter>.
The "Polyline" dialog window of the "Action" tool bar features various options for creating a polyline.

Press the arrow icon. The following "Construct Polyline" dialog


window opens:
Construct polyline

"Construct Polyline" dialog field

Fig. 4-63

Select "Closed"
Automatically links start and end point of the polyline.
Select "B-spline"
Displays the polyline as a B-spline.
A B-spline is a curve in a wedge determined by two construction
lines. The spline is calculated so that it touches the connection line
between two neighboring points in the center at a tangent.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-73

Select "Through the points"


The spline runs through internally calculated support points so that
it intersects with the given points.
Select "Start angle"
The open spline through the points can start with a fixed start angle
to ensure tangential adjustment to another element.
Select "End angle"
The open spline through the points can end with a fixed angle to
ensure tangential adjustment to another element.
Dissolve

A polyline with spline can be dissolved into lines in the context


menu of the element.
The accuracy of the dynamic dissolution can be set under "Tools"
> "Options" > "Object" > "Polyline". The value given here states by
which maximum quantity of the drawing unit the dissolved lines
deviates from the original spline.

Modify polyline

A polyline which has already been created can also be subsequently edited.
To this purpose select the polyline and open the context menu with
the right mouse button. Select the "Activate" option to activate the
individual points of the polyline, i.e. released for editing.
The polyline comprises start, corner and end points. Each individual line also features another point in the center of the line. In
addition the center point of the entire polyline object is displayed.

Shift start, corner or end


point

Move the mouse pointer over the point you want to shift. The
mouse pointer changes. Hold the mouse button down and shift the
point to the required position.

Shift line center point

Move the mouse pointer over the point you want to shift. The
mouse pointer changes. Hold the mouse button down and shift the
point to the required position. Two new individual lines are created
with one new center point each.

4-74

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

1 Start point

4 End point

2 Corner point

5 Center point

3 Intermediate point
Polyline point types

Fig. 4-64

Alternatively click the point you wish to shift, move the mouse
pointer to the required new position and reposition it by reclicking.
The coordinates of the start, corner and end points can also be
entered numerically with the "Action" tool bar.

Modify polyline action bar

Fig. 4-65

Removing points

Click the respective point and remove it by pressing the <Del> key.

Shift polyline object

Move over the center point of the object, hold the mouse button
down and shift the polyline object to the required position.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-75

6.6

> Ellipse

After selecting the "Ellipse" submenu in the "Draw" menu there are
various different options for drawing ellipses.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

Ellipse action bar

Fig. 4-66

> Center and radii


With this function an ellipse is created from the parameters center
point, main and second radius.

1 Main radius

3 Angle

2 Second radius
Ellipse: Center point, radii and angle

Fig. 4-67

The angle of the main axis to the horizontal is determined at the


same time with the destination point of the main radius.
> Center and 2 tangents
This function is used to create an ellipse which has a defined
center point and which touches two lines of the drawing at a
tangent.
First the center point is determined and then the two tangents
selected.
> From five points
This function creates an ellipse from five points.

4-76

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.7

> Arc of an ellipse

After selecting the submenu "Arc of an ellipse" in the "Draw" menu


there are various options for drawing arcs of ellipses available.
The "Action" tool bar changes accordingly.
Ellipse arcs are created with the aid of the functions described in
the "Ellipses" section. If an arc of an ellipse is created from the
center point, the main and second radius, it is necessary to enter
the start and end angle as well as the ellipse parameters described
in the "Ellipse" section.

1 Main radius

4 Start angle

2 Second radius

5 End angle

3 Main angle
Arc of an ellipse

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

Fig. 4-68

4-77

6.8

> Bitmap

When the "Bitmap" submenu is selected, a bitmap can be pasted


into the drawing.
This can serve as a design feature, but is often also useful as a
construction background when data are to be used.
The following bitmap file formats are supported:

BMP (Windows Bitmap format)

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group Format)

PCX (Zsoft Bitmap format)

> Open

Supported bitmap formats

Fig. 4-69

Select the required bitmap file from the menu window which opens
when the function is activated.

4-78

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Size and position of the bitmap

Fig. 4-70

In the next step, you determine the size of the bitmaps. Here, you
can specify whether the bitmap shall keep the width-to-height ratio.
Furthermore, you can enter the angle to the base line. After you
have confirmed the entry by clicking on "OK", a frame appears in
the size of the image and can be positioned on the drawing field.
At the end, the bitmap resolution must be defined.

Image resolution

Fig. 4-71

The different characteristics of the bitmap can be changed at a


later stage. To do this, mark the bitmap object, click the right
mouse button and select "Properties".

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-79

> Modify bitmap properties

"Modify bitmap properties" dialog window

Fig. 4-72

Card Bitmap
Stipulates the position ("X", "Y") and the size ("Width", "Height") of
the bitmap object. It is also possible to determine whether the side
ratio should be maintained if the size is changed ("Maintain side
ratio").
Card Layer
The bitmap object can be assigned a certain drawing layer (details
refer to Section 9.1 "> Layers").
Card Laser
Laser parameters can be assigned to the bitmap object, parameter
settings can be modified (details refer to Section 7.3 "Laser" >
"Laser parameters").
Card Resolution
The resolution of the bitmap and the connection with a variable can
be determined.
Note
When a laser parameter is allocated, the bitmap is lasered with a
so-called dithering process. The (laser) point density of the gray
shade is then modified. With a high point density the bitmap
appears dark at the respective position, and with a low point
density light.
If sequence is allocated to the bitmap as a laser parameter (refer to
the Section 7.3 "Laser menu" > "Laser parameter" > "Sequence"),
the gray level depth of the bitmap object is converted so that it
corresponds to the number of laser parameters contained in the
sequence (for example if 16 laser parameters are contained in the
sequence, the bitmap is converted to a 16 gray level bitmap). The
first parameter within the sequence lasers the darkest, the last
parameter the lightest points (gray level). Each pixel of the bitmap
is lasered with the laser parameters corresponding to its gray level.

4-80

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.9

> Dimensioning

After selecting the "Dimensioning" submenu in the "Draw" menu


various dimensions can be created.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

"Action" dimensioning tool bar

Fig. 4-73

> Horizontal/Vertical/Diagonal
With these functions horizontal/vertical and diagonal dimensions
from the start, end and position point of dimensioning are created.
Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start and end
point.
The position point appears as a suggested value offset by the
double dimensioning text size either upwards or downwards in
order to obtain a defined distance with multiple dimensions. To this
purpose the dimension must be concluded without changing the
position point with <Enter>.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-81

> Radius/Diameter
With this function a radius or diameter dimension is created.
To this purpose move to an arc of a circle and then determine the
position point for dimensioning.

Dimensioning, Radius/Diameter

Fig. 4-74

> Angle (3 points)


With this function an angle dimension formed from start, center,
end and position point of the dimension is created
Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start, center and
end point.
The dimensioning angle is created from the angle between both
lines "center point start point" and "center point end point"
> Angle (4 points)
With this function an angle dimension formed from two lines with
the start, center, end and position point of the dimension is
created.
Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start and end
points.
> Angle (2 lines)
This function measures an angle formed with two lines.
The dimensioning angle results from the angle between the two
lines.

4-82

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

6.10 > Hatching


After selecting the "Hatching" submenu in the "Draw" menu
hatching can be allocated to objects.
The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.

Hatching action bar

Fig. 4-75

> Inside point


This function is used to create hatching by specifying the inside
point. When the mouse pointer is inside a closed edging, hatching
is calculated in accordance with the hatching style. To apply
hatching, press the left mouse button.
In the "Action" tool bar the hatching styles can be set or modified
which determine the concrete appearance of the hatching.
> With islands
If rectangles or polygons are drawn inside one another, only the
part of the rectangle or polygon is filled which was selected.
Islands are then created inside the hatching.
Proceed as follows to implement islands inside the hatching:
Draw the required hatching; select "With islands". Finally select the
outer object for hatching; all objects are hatched. The program
prompts the user to select the required islands. Conclude the
function with <Enter>.

6.11 > Point


This function is used to draw a point. The geometric shape of the
point in the drawing is defined in "Tools" > "Options" > "Point", refer
to Section 10.9 "Tools menu" > "Options".

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-83

6.12 > Tools


After selecting the submenu "Tools" in the "Draw" menu existing
objects can be reworked.

Tools action bar

Fig. 4-76

> Trim (cut off)


This function is used to cut over overhangs from objects.
The geometric coherence may possibly be lost, a rectangle is
broken up into individual lines, a circle into an arc.
After activation of the function the mouse pointer assumes the form
of a pair of scissors, indicating that a trimming procedure can be
initiated.
In order to cancel the function, press the <Esc> key or select
another menu item.
> Break

1 One line
Tools, Break

2 Three lines
Fig. 4-77

With this function an object can be divided at its intersection points


among other objects of the drawing.
The existing geometric coherence may be lost, a rectangle is
broken up into individual lines, a circle into an arc.

4-84

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

After activation of the function the mouse pointer assumes the


shape of a pair of scissors, indicating that trimming can be initiated.
To exit the function, press <Esc> or select another menu point.
> Extend
With this function it is possible to extend objects to the next
intersection point with another object of the drawing.
The position of the mouse pointer stipulates which side of a line or
an arc of a circle should be extended.
If a mouse pointer is positioned above parts of an object which can
be extended, it changes shape. The respective object is extended
by clicking.
If the extension is to reach through to a certain object, this can be
first selected when holding down the <Ctrl> or <Strg> key all
clicked next objects are then extended to the selected object. In
this manner an object can be extended to objects without a
common intersection point or to objects which are not in immediate
proximity.
To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.
> Champfer
With this function corners of lines (polylines, rectangles, polygons)
can be capitalized.
The existing geometric links are lost, the object is broken down into
individual lines.
If the mouse pointer is on parts of objects which can be rounded, it
changes its form, the object is capitalized by clicking.
The following properties can be entered in the "Action" tool bar.
The setting in "Distance" is used to specify whether it is defined:

As a length of the capitalized line section ("Side length"),

As a length of the vertical on the chamfer through the corner


point ("Distance from the corner"),

As a length of the chamfer ("Length of the chamfer").

The setting in angle is used to specify whether it is defined:

As an angle between the chamfered line section and chamfer


("to the side"),

As an angle between the capitalized and bisecting line of the


original lines ("to the center").

To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-85

> Fillet (round)


With this function corners of lines (polylines, rectangles, polygons)
can be rounded.
The existing geometric links are lost, the object is broken down into
individual lines.
If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be
rounded, it changes its form, the object is rounded by clicking. If
the selected rounding radius is too great, rounding is not
performed.
The rounding radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar.
To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.
Modify the fillet radius

The fillet radius of an arc of a circle which was created by rounding, i.e. which connects tangentially with two lines or arcs, can be
subsequently changed while retaining the tangential alignment.
To this purpose select the arc of the circle, open the context menu
by clicking the right mouse button and perform the required
changes in the "Properties" dialog window.
> Group fillet (fillet all corners of a path)
This function is used to uniformly round all corners of linked lines
or circle arcs (also of polygons or rectangles).
The existing geometric coherence is lost, the object is broken down
into individual lines.
If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be
rounded, it changes its form, the object is rounded by clicking.
If the selected rounding radius is too great, rounding is not performed.
The rounding radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar.
To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.

Modify the fillet radius

The fillet radius of an arc of a circle which was created by rounding, i.e. which connects tangentially with two lines or arcs, can be
subsequently changed while retaining the tangential alignment.
To this purpose pick the arc of the circle, open the context menu by
clicking the right mouse button and perform the required changes
in the "Properties" dialog window.

4-86

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Concave fillet (groove)


With this function corners of lines (polylines or rectangles) can be
grooved.
The existing geometric coherence is lost, the object is broken down
into individual lines.
If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be
grooved, it changes its form, the object is grooved by clicking.
The grooving radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar.
To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.
> Equidistant (Offset)
With this function an equidistant can be created at a fixed distance
parallel to an open or closed line (rectangle, polyline, lines with
arcs of circles) so that the minimum distance is the same in all
points.
If an equidistant is to be applied to the entire object, move the
mouse pointer on the object.
In the "Action" tool bar the current set distance is displayed and
can be modified if required.
Conclude the action by clicking the mouse button or the Enter key.
If an equidistant is only to be applied to part of a contour, the start
and end points can be determined by clicking the mouse button
while holding down the <Ctrl> key or by an entry in the "Action" tool
bar.
The <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys can be used to switch between
any different connection paths.

Tools, Equidistant

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

Fig. 4-78

4-87

> Round off lines


Using this function, two lines which are not touching each other
can be closed by means of a circular arc.
If the mouse pointer is over a line which is to be rounded with a
second line, it changes its shape. The procedure starts by clicking
the mouse. As soon as the mouse pointer touches the two lines,
the circular arc with the set rounding radius is automatically shown.
By clicking on the second line, the lines are connected to the
circular arc.
Only objects of line type can be connected in this way.
In the "Action" tool bar, you can enter the rounding radius.
To exit the function, press the <Esc> key or select another menu
item.

6.13 > Data object


The "Data object" submenu in the "Draw" menu permits
compilation of text or barcodes.
When the "Data object" submenu has been selected, a dialog
window opens in which it can be selected whether a text or
a barcode should be created.
Data object

"Data object" dialog window

Fig. 4-79

The text or value used in the data object can be fixed and
invariable ("static object") or defined as a variable. Variables are
only filled with the required content during marking.

4-88

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Reference variable
Here a reference variable can be selected by its name from a list.
The selection "Static object" permits the creation of invariable text.
Button Change list of variables
This entry opens a dialog window in which object variables can be
defined, modified and organized. Details are contained in the
Section "Menu" > "Laser" > "Variables".
Group field Appearance
Option As text
The data object to be created is shown as text.
Button Properties text
This button opens a dialog window in which the text can be entered
and its properties defined. See Section "Data object" > "As text" >
"Text".
Option As barcode
The data object to be created is shown as a machine-readable
code.
Button Barcode properties
This button opens a dialog window in which the properties of the
barcode can be defined, refer to Section "Data object" > "As
barcode" > "Barcode".
Button Place
This button interactively inserts the previously created data object
(text or barcode) with the selected properties into the drawing.
The object is fixed on the mouse pointer and can be moved to any
position and inserted by clicking with the mouse button.
When the "Action" tool bar is activated, a dialog window opens
which permits the numeric entry of the required position
coordinates as well as the horizontal angle of the data object. In
addition the "Properties" button can be used to make subsequent
modifications to the properties.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-89

> Data object > As text > Select card Text


Text is entered in this dialog window, its properties determined and
its position determined.
Properties of the text object

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

Fig. 4-80

Card Text
Text entry
The required text is entered here. Texts with more than one line
are also possible.
Note
Entry of special characters can possibly produce unwanted results
as several keyboard drivers block Unicode conversion. It is
therefore possible to directly insert the Unicode code of a special
character directly into the text. It starts with: "\u", followed by the
number "12345" in decimal characters and is concluded with ";".
Example: CITRO\u203;N CITRON
This conversion can be switched off in this dialog if required (see
below). The Unicode number of a special character can be
determined with the Font Editor.
Text size
Here the text size can be changed. If no entries are made, the
setting of the Font Editor for the text size is taken as a standard.

4-90

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font
Here the character set is selected. All character sets can be used
which have been created and registered with the Font Editor.
Select "No Unicode conversion (\u12345;)"
The character combination "\u12345;" is not interpreted as a Unicode number, but left unchanged.
Select "Mirrored"
Text is mirrored horizontally.
Character spacing
Here the character spacing can be changed. If no entries are made
(character spacing remains "100%"), the setting of the Font Editor
for the character spacing is taken as a standard.
Line spacing
Here the text line spacing can be changed. If no entries are made
(line spacing remains "0 mm"), the setting of the Font Editor for the
line spacing is taken as a standard.
Font spacing
Here the font spacing can be changed. If no entries are made (font
spacing remains "100%"), the setting of the Font Editor for the font
spacing is taken as a standard.
Italic
Here the italics can be changed. If no entries are made (italics
remain "0"), the setting of the Font Editor for the italics is taken as
a standard.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-91

> Data object > As text > Select card Position


The position of the entered text is determined in this dialog
window.
Properties of the text object

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

Fig. 4-81

Card Position
Group field Horizontal
Option Left
The insertion point of the text is on the left-hand side of the textbox, the text is positioned flush left in the text box.
Option Centered
The insertion point of the text is horizontally in the center of the
textbox, the text is centered in the text box.
Option Right
The insertion point of the text is on the right-hand side of the
textbox, the text is positioned flush right in the text box.
Option Justification
The text is positioned as justified in the textbox if the "Break"
textbox is set.

4-92

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Group field Vertical


Option Bottom
The insertion point of the text is at the bottom edge of the textbox.
Option Base line
The insertion point of the text is vertically on the base line of the
text block (with texts of several lines: On the base line of the first
line of text). This base line is defined in Font Editor for this
character set.
Option Centered
The insertion point of the text is vertically in the center of the
textbox.
Option Top
The insertion point of the text is at the top edge of the textbox.
X position
The X position of a text which is already in the drawing can be
changed from the properties window here.
Y position
The Y position of a text which is already in the drawing can be
changed from the properties window here.
Angle
The angle of the text is set here.
Group field Circular text
The text is arranged in a circular form.
Radius
Here the radius for the circle is specified on which the text is
arranged.
To position the circular text with the top of the character facing
inwards to the center of the circle, the radius must have a negative
preceding sign.
Position rotation
The position rotation states the angle around which the text is
regularly distributed. The center of the text is therefore on the
angle stated here. Text of several lines is positioned in succession.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-93

Group field Textbox


Option No box
The text is inserted without a textbox in keeping with the text size.
Option Break
Depending on the set width of the textbox, lines with existing
spaces are broken so that the text is inside the textbox. Individual
words which are longer than the textbox width remain unchanged.
Option Cut
If the text is larger than the specified textbox size, it is cut off.
Option Fit
If the text is larger than the specified textbox size, it is adapted by
compression.
Width
Here the required textbox width is specified.
Height
Here the required textbox height is specified.

4-94

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Data object > as barcode > Select card Barcode


In this dialog window the text to be coded is entered, its properties
determined, its position and accompanying text is defined.
Properties of the barcode
object

"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window

Fig. 4-82

Card Barcode
Text
The text for coding is entered here. It depends on the set barcode
type which characters can be coded.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-95

Barcode type
The various barcode types vary considerably with regard to the
characters which can be used, the coding and the length of the
required text.
Available 1D
barcodes

No. of
characters

Character sets Length of


characters

Check mark/
quantity

Check mark/
algorithm

Code 2/5
Code 2/5
interleaved

10

0..9

even number

no

no

10

0..9

even number

optional 1

2/5 Modulo 10

Code 39

43

0..9 A..Z
.+-*/$%

variable

optional 1

Modulo 43

Code CODABAR 19

0..9 A B C D
+-/$%

variable

no

no

Code 93

43

0..9 A..Z
.+-*/$%

variable

optional 2

Code 11

12

0..9 + -

variable

1 fix
(optional 2)

e/o Modulo 11

Code 128 A

105

0..9 A..Z

variable

1 fix c

Modulo 103

Code 128 B

105

0..9 a..z A..Z

variable

1 fix c

Modulo 103

Code 128 C

105

0..9

variable

1 fix c

Modulo 103

Code EAN8

10

0..9

7 + 1 test char. 1 fix c

e/o Modulo 10

Code EAN13

10

0..9

12 + 1 t.c.

1 fix c

e/o Modulo 10

Code EAN14
(2/5i)

10

0..9

13 + 1 t.c.

1 fix c

e/o Modulo 10

Code EAN128 A

105

0..9 A..Z

19 + 1 t.c.

2 fix c

Modulo 10+103

Code EAN128 B

105

0..9 a..z A..Z

19 + 1 t.c.

2 fix c

Modulo 10+103

Code EAN128 C

105

0..9

19 + 1 t.c.

2 fix c

Modulo 10+103

Code UPC A

10

0..9

11 + 1 t.c.

1 fix c

e/o Modulo 10

Code UPC E

10

0..9

0+6

fix in parity

fix in parity

Available 1D barcodes

Tab. 4-1

c = invariable. Changes in settings do not


have any influence on the barcode geometry.

4-96

Available 1D
barcodes

Module width
=X
in mm

Font spacing
in mm

Ratio
wide/narrow

Code 2/5

0.19..

-continuous d

2.0..4.5

Code 2/5
interleaved

0.19..

-continuous d

2.0..3.0

Code 39

0.19..

1..5.3 x X

2.0..3.0

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Available 1D
barcodes

Module width
=X
in mm

Font spacing
in mm

Ratio
wide/narrow

Code
CODABAR

0.19..

1..5.3 x X

2.4..3.5

Code 93

0.19..

-continuous d

fix c

Code 11

0.19..

-continuous d

2.24..3.5

Code
128A,B,C

0.19..1.27

-continuous d

fix c

Code EAN8

0.27..0.66

-continuous d

fix c

Code EAN13

0.27..0.66

-continuous d

fix c

Code EAN14
(2/5i)

0.27..0.66

-continuous d

2.0..3.0

Code
EAN128A,B,C

0.19..1.27

-continuous d

fix c

Code UPC A

0.27..0.66

-continuous d

fix c

Code UPC E

0.27..0.66

-continuous d

fix c
Tab. 4-2

c = permanently specified. Changes in settings do not have any


influence on the barcode geometry.
d = continuous. If the spaces between the individual barcode
characters do not serve as space markers but for information
coding, the barcode has the property continuous. Barcodes in
which spaces can occur between the characters are referred to as
discreet barcodes, e.g. Code 39 and Codabar.

Available 2D
barcodes

No. of characters

Character sets

Check mark/
quantity

Check mark/
algorithm

Datamatrix

128 ASCII

Red Solomon

Datamatrix square 128 ASCII

Red Solomon

PDF417

128 ASCII

Red Solomon

QR Code
Numeric

10

0..9

7,15,25,30%

Red Solomon

QR Code
Alphanumeric

45

0..9 A..Z space $


%*+-./:);

7,15,25,30%

Red Solomon

QR Code
Binary

255 ASCII

7,15,25,30%

Red Solomon

QR Code
Kanji

UNICODE

7,15,25,30%

Red Solomon

Dotcode
Tab. 4-3

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-97

Available 2D
barcodes

Rows

Columns

Square

Maximum character
length

Datamatrix

10..144
Stepsize 2,4,..

10..144

Numeric 3116
Alphanumeric 2335

Datamatrix square 8..18

18..48

PDF417

3..90
Stepsize 1

1..30
Stepsize 1

QR Code
Numeric

21..73
Stepsize 4

21..73
Stepsize 4

1.167

QR Code
Alphanumeric

21..73
Stepsize 4

21..73
Stepsize 4

707

QR Code
Binary

21..73
Stepsize 4

21..73
Stepsize 4

486

QR Code
Kanji

21..73
Stepsize 4

21..73
Stepsize 4

299

Dot code

6..9

1
Tab. 4-4

Format
Here the format of the 2D barcode can be set.
Coding
Here the coding of the 2D barcode can be set.
Select "Filling alternately"
The code is alternately filled.
Select "Invert"
In the event of light marking on a dark background the barcode
must be inverted with certain code types. The intervals are marked
and the bars omitted. For better visibility the width and the height of
the idle zone (see below) can be adjusted.
Select "With check mark"
The check mark is also output.

4-98

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Round modules"


With the 2D barcodes the individual modules are not output as
rectangles but as circles. The arc resolution of these circles can be
set (see below).
Select "Draw module frame"
A module frame is drawn around each individual module
additionally to the actual filling in order to smooth the edge.
Select "Module frame before filling"
The module frame is drawn before the filling.
Font spacing
On some barcode types the distance between the individual characters can be set.
Ratio wide/narrow
On some barcode types the ratio of the wide bars to the narrow
bars can be set.
Filling distance lines
Here the filling distance of the filling lines to the module frame is
set.
Filling distance to the module frame
Here the edge of the filling to the calculated module frame is set.
Idle zone, Width
Here the idle zone in front of and behind the barcode is set for
inverted barcodes which is necessary to make the first module
visible for reading devices.
Idle zone, Height
Here the idle zone above and below the barcode is set for inverted
barcodes.
Arc resolution in degrees
In round modules of the 2D barcode the arc resolution is set here
in degrees.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-99

Data object > As barcode > Select card Position/size


Properties of the barcode
object

"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window

Fig. 4-83

Card Position/size
X position
The X position of a barcode which is already in the drawing can be
changed from the properties window here.
Y position
The Y position of a barcode which is already in the drawing can be
changed from the properties window here.
Angle of rotation
The rotation of the barcode is set.

4-100

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Total size


Width
The entire width of the barcode can be set. The width of the individual modules is selected so that all modules can be fitted in this
width.
Height
The total height of the barcode can be set. The barcode height of
the individual modules is adjusted.
Option Module size
Barcode height
The height of an individual module of the barcode can be set. The
total height of the barcode is adjusted to this height.
Module width
The width of an individual module of the barcode can be set. The
total width of the barcode is adjusted to this height.
Select "One line barcode"
Here the barcode is marked with a centered line instead of two
border lines.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-101

> Data object > As barcode > Select card Text


Properties of the barcode
object

"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window

Fig. 4-84

Card Text
Select "Display also text"
The text of the barcode is displayed as plain text together with the
barcode.
Font
Here the font is selected. All fonts can be used which have been
created and registered with the Font Editor.
Relative position X
The plain text can be changed in its position in the X direction in
relation to the existing barcode (left-hand bottom barcode corner
= 0.0).
The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the
functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set
position".

4-102

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Relative position Y
The plain text can be changed in its position in the Y direction in
relation to the existing barcode (left-hand bottom barcode corner
= 0.0).
The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the
functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set
position".
Relative angle
The angle of the plain text can be changed in relation to the existing barcode.
The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the
functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set
position".
Horizontal text position
Option Left
The text is inserted flush left in relation to the existing barcode. The
respective values of the "Relative position" change automatically.
Option Center
The text is inserted at the center in relation to the existing barcode.
The respective values of the "Relative position" change automatically.
Option Right
The text is inserted flush right in relation to the existing barcode.
The respective values of the "Relative position" change
automatically.
Text size
Here the text size can be changed. If no entries are made, the
setting of the Font Editor for the text size is taken as a standard.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw menu

4-103

Group field Set position


Down
The text is inserted below the existing barcode. The respective
values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change
automatically.
Top
The text is inserted above the existing barcode. The respective
values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change
automatically.
Left
The text is inserted to the left of the existing barcode rotated by 90
degrees. The respective values of the "Relative position" and the
"Relative angle" change automatically.
Right
The text is inserted to the right of the existing barcode rotated by
90 degrees. The respective values of the "Relative position" and
the "Relative angle" change automatically.

4-104

Draw menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.

Laser menu

In this menu, settings are made which affect the marking process.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

Fig. 4-85

Laser menu

4-105

7.1

> Print project

Various project data can be printed with this menu item. The Print
equipment dialog window is displayed first after selecting this item.
The "Print project" dialog window appears after selecting the
printer and confirming with "OK". You can activate various options.

Print project

Fig. 4-86

Printable area
The values in the fields specify the size of the printable area (paper
format).
Select "Print laser parameter"
The names of the laser parameters used are printed by activating
this checkbox.
Select "Print main parameter"
The main parameters are also printed by activating this checkbox.
Select "Print internal parameter"
The internal laser parameters are also printed by activating this
checkbox.
Select "Print lines width parameter"
The parameters configured in the menu "Laser" > "Laser
parameters > Width" are printed by activating this checkbox.

4-106

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Print project data"


The project data entered via the menu item "Laser" > "Project data"
are printed by activating this checkbox.
Select "Print drawing"
The drawing is printed by activating this checkbox.
Select "Print segmentation"
The segmentation data is printed by activating this checkbox.
Font project data
You can define the font and font size here of the project data to be
printed.
Font laser parameter
You can define the font and font size here of the laser parameters
to be printed.
Select "Show preview"
A preview is displayed prior to printing by activating this checkbox.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-107

7.2

> Export project data as XML file

This menu point enables to export the project data as XML file.

Export project data

Fig. 4-87

Here the target directory and the name are determined. A special
directory has been preset. With the button "+" a new path can be
defined.

7.3

> Laser parameters

The laser parameters are a central part of the marking program.


They determine how the laser beam affects the workpiece and
therefore have a considerable effect on the quality of marking and
the marking time.
Basic information on laser
parameters

There are two principle types of laser parameter:

global or internal parameters and

local parameters in the current project/marking program.

Global (internal) parameters apply for all projects. Here laser


parameters are saved which can always be used for different
projects, for example annealing V2A. The parameters of the
current project can therefore normally be derived from these global
parameters.

Change of global laser parameters!


These values are globally optimized at the works and saved
in the registration database of the computer.
CAUTION

4-108

They should therefore only be changed by trained operating


personnel!

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

The global parameters are saved in the file 'LaserCADIni.xml'. The


program saves the path for this central file in the registration
database of the respective computer. For this reason networked
computers can access a joint 'LaserCADIni-file' which was saved
on a server.
The local parameters are saved in the respective marking program.
Local parameters can be defined in two ways:

Local parameters as
reference

as references to global parameters,

as copies.

Local parameters compare themselves each time a project is


started with the global parameters of the same name in the file
'LaserCADIni.xml' and take their settings. Changes and optimization of the global laser parameters therefore flow automatically
into the respective projects.
If a global parameter is deleted, the program automatically uses
the reference as a copy.

Local parameters as copy

Local parameters remain static in the marking program and can


only be explicitly changed. This mechanism is only then useful if
you consciously want to deviate from the set laser parameters in a
special case.
Note
Generally the option "Local parameters as copy" is the best for
defining local parameters, as the copy can only then be optimized
for the specific workpiece without affecting the (original) global
parameters (and therefore other workpieces).

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-109

Administrate laser parameter

For all laser marking systems

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

Structure and use

Fig. 4-88

In the left-hand window of the dialog window "Administrate laser


parameter" a tree directory appears which shows the structures of
the parameters. In this directory tree folders can be opened and
closed and individual entries moved to change their sequence in
the same way as in Windows.
The parameters can be moved by highlighting with the mouse
pointer and dragging to the required position. If the parameter is
dragged to a folder, it is inserted into this folder. The name can be
changed by double-clicking the existing name. A highlighted entry
can be deleted with the <Del> key.
Moving a defined global parameter to the local department
automatically generates a copy with a reference, i.e. this parameter
is used now in the current project and changes automatically each
time when the global parameter is modified.
If the <Ctrl> key is held down when a defined global parameter is
moved into the local department, a local parameter is created as a
true copy. This copied parameter is not linked with a global
parameter, it is only valid for this project and is not automatically
adjusted.

4-110

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

It is also possible to move parameters from the local to the global


department. This is, however, only of use if a parameter created as
a local parameter is to be globally used as a copy.
The "Reference" property is marked with an additional icon (small
downward arrow). If a local reference parameter does not find its
global reference (which it searches for with the parameter name), a
different reference symbol appears (small question mark).
Each time a project has started this parameter then searches once
more for a global reference, also if it is, for example, used on another computer.
If the global reference is not found in such a case, the parameters
of the global reference saved as a copy are used.
Additional modifications of the laser parameters can be made with
the following submenus:

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Administrate

Main parameters

Intern

Width

Dotted line

Sequence

Laser menu

4-111

> Laser parameters > Card Administrate


The most important information for administration of laser
parameters are made in this window.
Administrate laser
parameters

For all laser marking systems

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

Fig. 4-89

Button Insert new parameter


A new parameter can be created. In the left-hand folder window an
entry must be highlighted (either in the section "Global parameters"
or "in this project"). After selecting "Insert new parameter" a new
laser parameter is created. It is automatically given a name
(parameter X), which can then be changed (refer to the section
"Structure and use").
Button Delete entry
The entry (parameter or folder) highlighted in the left-hand
directory window is deleted.
If a global laser parameter is deleted from which local parameters
are derived as a reference, the icon changes (upward arrow with
question mark) to show that the reference parameter is no longer
there.

4-112

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

If the message "This parameter cannot be deleted as it is in use"


appears, the parameter is an element of a sequential laser
parameter and must first be removed in the "Reference" submenu
(also refer to the "Reference" section) or the laser parameter is
allocated to one or more objects in the marking program (in this
case the respective objects must first be allocated to another laser
parameter before it can be deleted).
Button Copy parameter
In the left-hand folder window an entry must be highlighted (either
in the section "Global parameters" or "in this project"). After
selecting "Copy parameter" a new laser parameter is created in
accordance with the highlighted one which has identical values. It
is automatically given a name (parameter X), which can then be
changed (refer to the section "Structure and Use").
Group field Global parameters
Button Insert new folder
This function serves to structure the section "Global parameters"
(e.g. in accordance with different materials which have to be
processed) and is therefore only available in the "Global
parameters" section. An entry must be highlighted in the left-hand
directory window. After selecting "Insert new folder" a new folder is
created after the highlighted folder. It must have a name. Any
number of subfolders can also be created.
In new projects
Option Do not use
This function can be used to define that one or more "Global
parameters" are not automatically valid in new projects (e.g. as
they are only seldom used). This property can also be allocated to
folders; all parameters which are in the respective folder are not
active in new projects.
Option Use as reference
In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the
"Global parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a reference in new projects. They are automatically updated when the global parameters of the same name
are changed.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-113

Option Use as copy


In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the
"Global parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a copy in new projects. They are not
automatically updated when the global parameters of the same
name are changed.
Parameters in this project
Option Reference
In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the
"Local parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a reference in the current project. They are
automatically updated when the global parameters of the same
name are changed.
Option Copy
In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the
"Local parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a copy in the current project. They are not
automatically updated when the global parameters of the same
name are changed.
> Laser parameters > Card Main parameter
In this dialog window the main parameters of a laser parameter
selected in the left-hand directory window are set.
This function is not available:

with sequence
"Sequence"),

with local parameters which are defined as reference to global


parameters (also refer to the section "Administrate laser
parameter" > "Administrate").

parameters

(also

refer

to

the

section

The set values are displayed graphically between the left-hand


directory window and the dialog window. A scale in millimeters
shows the actual size of the laser points which are displayed in
color.
The image depends on the set speed, the pulse frequency and the
track width.

4-114

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Administrate laser
parameters

For all laser marking systems

"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window

Fig. 4-90

Note
In the submenu "Main parameter" the program only permits the
entry of values in a range which is technically possible or recommendable for laser marking. If values drop below or exceed
these limits, a prompt window opens which shows the permissible
value range.
Defocusing
Setting of the value around which the focus of the laser beam is
outside the focus during marking. Defocusing can assume positive
and negative values. With positive values the focus is below the
working distance (the working distance increases) and with
negative values the focus is above the working distance (the
working distance decreases). The maximum adjustable value depends on the lens employed.
This function can be used if

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

a focus diameter which is larger than the minimum possible


focus diameter is to be set on the workpiece (e.g. to obtain a
greater track width on the workpiece)
or

marking is not performed on one level, but on different levels


(different marking heights).

Laser menu

4-115

Color
Here it is possible to define which display colors the drawing
elements (lines, circles, rectangles etc.) which are provided with
this laser parameter are to have on the screen or the printer.
The selected color does not have any influence on the results of
the laser output, it only serves for better orientation within the
drawing.
In addition to the standard color individual colors can be defined
with the "other colors" option.
Z offset
Setting of the value around which the focus of the laser beam can
be offset in relation to the current Z position of the Z axis.
This function can be used to obtain certain effects with varying
marking heights. This is only possible if the beam source is
mounted on a motorized movable Z axis. If the offset is within the
range which can be achieved with defocusing (see above), this
parameter should be used, as this is considerably faster than
moving the Z axis.
Track width
This value influences the graphic display of the laser points in the
dialog window and in the drawing itself.
The actual track width on the workpiece requiring marking
depends on the material and laser and must therefore be
determined experimentally.
The entered value influences the filling routine during marking of
codes (e.g. barcode or DataMatrix Code) and the line spacing
during use of the option "Parallel line" (refer to Section "Laser
parameter" > "Width").
Note
This image can be switched on and off for zoomed images under
"View, only thin lines".
Power
Setting of the laser power in percent of the maximum power of the
employed laser.
The required value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide
control.

4-116

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Velocity
Setting of the scanning speed in millimeters per second. The
required value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide
control. The top and bottom limits depend on the laser hardware
and are saved in the registration database of the computer.
Pulse frequency
Setting of the pulse repetition frequency in Hertz. The required
value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide control. The
top and bottom limits depend on the laser hardware and are saved
in the registration database of the computer.
Button Pulse
Opens two input fields into which the number of pulses per point
and the pulse width can be entered in microseconds.
Administrate laser
parameters

For all laser marking systems

"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window

Fig. 4-91

The entry of the number of pulses per point is only relevant during
marking of bitmaps and points. With the pulse width the opening
time of the "Q-switch" (switch for pulsing the beam) and therefore
the pulse form and the length are influenced. The pulse width
should be set to 5 microseconds as a standard. Greater pulse
widths mean a longer pulse duration. The pulse duration is in the
ns range (Nanoseconds).

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-117

First pulse
The first pulse of a series of pulses (e.g. of a line), in particular at
high pulse frequencies, has more energy than the following pulse.
The first pulse can therefore cause a hole at the beginning of the
line. TruTops Mark provides two different methods for minimizing
this effect. They are referred to as FirstPulseKiller (FPK) and
FirstPulseSuppression (FPS). The setting options in the "First
pulse" input field depend on the settings in the TruTops Mark
configuration.
Administrate laser parameters

For laser marking systems Series 3000 and 6000

"Laser parameters, Main parameter, First pulse" dialog


window

Fig. 4-92

The first pulse is deleted completely with FPK marking. The excess
energy is slowly and evenly applied to the workpiece prior to the
pulse series instead. This method is suitable for marking metal in
particular. It can scorch plastic however.

4-118

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

With FPS marking, the excess energy is distributed as evenly as


possible among the first pulses. The required settings depend on
the "Power", "Pulse frequency" and "Pulse amplitude" laser
parameters. They can be set globally with the diagnostics tool. An
attenuation value is assigned (to the first twelve pulses of a pulse
series) in the process. This setting is difficult since the attenuation
value of the pulse does not only affect the first but also the
following pulse. Ideally, the energy of the first pulses is monitored
during the optimization process by means of a quick photodiode
and an oscilloscope. Alternatively, the optimization can be based
on the application results.
As an alternative to the two methods, you can do without first pulse
treatment. This is recommended in the event of low pulse
frequencies in particular.
Note
Since changing the first pulse method affects the progress at the
beginning of a line, the internal laser parameter "Laser on delay"
may under certain circumstances have to be adjusted manually.
Administrate laser parameters For laser marking systems Series 3000 and 6000

"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Mode" dialog window

Fig. 4-93

Mode: PULSED
The pulsed mode corresponds to the default setting.
Mode: CW
The CW (Continuous Wave) mode refers to a continuous line
operation.
In continuous line operation, instead of the pulse number the point
duration for the marking of a point is indicated in microseconds.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-119

Simmer
Contrary to the first pulse with Series 3000 and 6000, for laser
marking system 5000 there is no first pulse rejection but a first
pulse amplification which is entered in percent in the "Simmer"
field. The first point pulses have a maximal pulse energy when set
on 100%. The default setting is 90%. When operating with high
pulse frequences and low power, lower percent values are
recommended.
Administrate laser
parameters

For laser marking system Series 5000

"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Simmer" dialog


window

Fig. 4-94

According to the set mode, the display of the dialog window


changes.
Mode: PULSED
The pulsed mode corresponds to the default setting. If the "Auto"
checkbox is activated, a minimum of pulse duration for the selected
frequency is selected which still provides an average output. This
corresponds to a maximum possible pulse peak power for the
selected pulse frequency. If "Auto" is not activated, the pulse
duration can be selected via the drop-down arrow. In case the
selection combination of pulse frequency and pulse duration
results in an impaired laser power, a red frame appears around the
entry field "Power". A full output can be achieved by increasing the
pulse frequency or pulse duration.

4-120

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Mode: CWM
When using the CWM (Continuous Wave modulated) mode, the
continuous line operation is interrrupted by the pulse frequency.
The pulse duration of the resulting pulses is indicated in percent of
the period time. The period time is the time interval between two
pulses.

Multihead
With a Multihead system, a laser head or both laser heads can be
assigned to the laser parameter.
Administrate laser
parameters

For all laser marking systems with a double head system

"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Multihead" dialog


window

Fig. 4-95

Head
To make a mark with laser head A, select "A1". Select "B1" for
laser head B. Select "A1 & B1" for synchronous marking.
Note
The selection of the laser heads depends on the installed and
configured hardware. Contact a TRUMPF branch office in your
country.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-121

> Laser parameters > Card Internal


In this dialog window the internal parameters of a laser parameter
selected in the left-hand directory window are set.
This function is not available:

if the basic configuration does not expressly permit this

with sequence parameters


"Sequence")

with local parameters which are defined as a reference to


global parameters (also refer to the Section "Administrate").

(also refer

to

the Section

With the internal laser parameters further settings can be made


which have an effect on the marking quality. Although they do not
have any influence on the thickness of the engraving, they play a
decisive role during dynamic scanning behavior (scanning velocity
during certain actions).

Change of global laser parameters!


These values are globally optimized at the works and saved
in the registration database of the computer.
CAUTION

They should therefore only be changed by trained operating


personnel!
With the "Quality" slide control all internal parameters can be
allocated common standard values. The setting ranges from "high
velocity" to "high quality".

Administrate laser
parameters

All laser marking systems

"Laser parameters, Internal" dialog window

4-122

Laser menu

Fig. 4-96

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Using settings other than standard"


If necessary all parameters can be changed individually if this
option is selected.

Polygon delay

Jump delay

Las On delay

Las Off delay

Mark delay

Step period

Jump velocity

Polygon delay
This delay time is inserted at the end of each vector within a vector
line. This means that all coordinates are correctly located and
prevents, for example, corners being ground off. The higher the
value for the polygon delay is set, the more accurately the set
position is reached. The value for polygon delay influenced the
marking time (the higher the value the longer marking takes). The
value is given in s.
Jump delay
At the end of a jump command the scanner mirrors require a
certain time to reach their set position. The higher the value for the
jump delay is set, the more accurately the set position is reached.
The value for jump delay influences the marking time (the higher
the value the longer marking takes). The value is given in s.
Las On delay
When a vector line is started, the inertia of the galvanic mirror must
be overcome. The "Laser On delay" states how many s after
starting of the vector line the laser should be switched on. This
value does not usually influence the marking time. The value is
given in s.
Las Off delay
At the end of a vector line the laser must remain switched on for
longer due to the following error in the galvanic control circuit of the
scanner of the laser. This value does not usually influence the
marking time. The value is given in s.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-123

Mark delay
At the end of a vector line it must be ensured that the set position
is correctly located. To this purpose the mark delay is introduced
before the jump command is activated. The higher the value for the
mark delay is set, the more accurately the set position is reached.
The value for mark delay influences the marking time (the higher
the value the longer marking takes). The value is given in s.
Step period
States the period with which the set positions are sent to the
scanner mirror. This value must normally not be changed. If the
value is too high, inaccurate marking can occur. This value does
not usually influence the marking time. The value is given in s.
Jump velocity
States the velocity with which the laser jumps from one object for
marking to the next. The higher the jump velocity, the shorter the
marking time. If the value is too high, inaccurate marking results
can occur. The value is stated in mm/s.
Information for optimizing the delays
This describes what can happen when internal parameters are
incorrectly set. Using the letters "RTC" as an example, the
following diagrams show the extent to which incorrectly set delays
can affect the results.
Laser on delay too short

Laser on delay too short

Fig. 4-97

Although the galvo mirrors have not yet reached the necessary
angular velocity at the beginning of a vector, the laser is already
switched on. The results are burn-ins at the start point of the
respective vectors.

4-124

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser on delay too long

Laser on delay too long

Fig. 4-98

The laser is switched on too late at the beginning of a vector. The


corresponding vectors are not marked from the start point
onwards.
Laser off delay too short

Laser off delay too short

Fig. 4-99

The laser is already switched off after a marking command


although the mirrors have not yet reached the vector position. The
corresponding vectors are not completely marked.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-125

Laser off delay too long

Laser off delay too long

Fig. 4-100

The laser is switched off too late after a marking command. The
laser is still on although the mirrors are clearly being stopped or
are already stationary. This causes burn-ins at each vector point.
Jump delay too short

Jump delay too short

Fig. 4-101

The vector that follows a jump command is already marked during


the necessary settling time of the mirrors around the end point of
the jump vector. A run-in or overshoot can be seen.
Jump delay too long
If the selected jump delay is too long, there are no visible negative
results. However, the marking time is increased.

4-126

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Marking delay too short

Marking delay too short

Fig. 4-102

Although the mirror has not yet reached the target position of the
last vector, the command of the subsequent jump vector is already
being carried out. As a result, the end of the marking vector is
turned in the direction of the jump vector.
Marking delay too long
If the selected marking delay is too long, there are no visible
negative results. However, the marking time is increased.
Polygon delay too short

Polygon delay too short

Fig. 4-103

The following marking command in a polyline is already started


although the mirrors have not yet reached the end of the vector for
the current marking command. As a result, the corners of the
polyline are rounded off.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-127

Polygon delay too long

Polygon delay too long

Fig. 4-104

In case the polygon delay is too long, the mirrors move too slowly
or they stop altogether between the marking commands. This
causes burn-ins at each vector point.

4-128

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Laser parameters > Card Width


In this dialog window all values for the width of the laser parameter
selected in the left-hand directory window are set.
This function is not available:

Administrate laser
parameters

with sequence parameters


"Sequence"),

with local parameters which are defined as a reference to


global parameters (also refer to the Section "Administrate").

(also refer

to

the Section

All laser marking systems

"Laser parameters Width" dialog window

Fig. 4-105

Two options for changing the track width are also available:

Wobbling

Parallel lines

Option Simple
The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter once. The
width achieved on the workpiece depends on the laser parameters
and the material properties of the workpiece (refer to the Section
"Main parameter"). In the CAD, these geometries are represented
using the line thickness which is set in the main parameters under
"Track width".
Note
This image can be switched on and off for zoomed images under
""Only thin lines".

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-129

Option Wobbling
The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter in cycloid
form. The width which occurs depends on the entered values for
width and the following distance. In the CAD, these geometries are
displayed by a line thickness of the corresponding width.
Width
Entry of the width of the wobbled geometry in millimeters. The
greater the set width, the slower the marking process.
Sequence
Entry of the sequence of two neighboring wobble cycles. The
smaller the value, the closer the individual cycles are, the slower
the process will be. Effective values for the sequence are in the
range of the "Track width" set in the main parameters.
Arc resolution
During output the wobble arcs are converted to vector lines. The
arc resolution entered here defines in degrees how many lines are
created (e.g. an arc resolution of 45 degrees produces eight lines).
Effective velocity
This value refers to the actual marking velocity of the respective
geometries. It is lower than the laser velocity defined in the main
parameters, as the path through the wobble arc (cycloid) is much
longer. The value serves only for information purposes and cannot
be changed.
Option Parallel lines
The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter several
times with an offset (in regular equidistants arranged around the
geometry). The width which occurs depends on the entered values
for width. In the CAD editor this geometry is displayed by a line
thickness of the corresponding width.
The width of an individual line which is used as a basis is the
defined value of the track width contained in the "Main parameter"
submenu (refer to the "Main parameter" Section). As this value
depends on the physical properties of the laser and the interaction
with the processed material, it must be determined experimentally.
The area filling value and the distance between the individual lines
are calculated.

4-130

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Width
Setting of the required width of the geometry on the workpiece in
millimeters.
Number
Setting of the number of parallel lines.
Area filling
Setting of the degree of covering with the parallel lines.
An area filling of below 100% results in spaces between the
individual parallel geometries, a value greater than 100% to the
respective cover. The number and distance of the individual lines is
calculated depending on the track width of the individual line (refer
to the Section "Main parameter"), the required width and the
covering.
Distance
Here the distance of the parallel lines to one another is set.
If the distance value is the same as the track width set in the main
parameters, covering is 100%. The covering and the number of the
individual lines is calculated depending on the track width of the
individual line, the required width and the distance.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-131

> Laser parameters > Card Dotted line


This dialog window is used to set the type of dotted line of the
geometric elements to which this laser parameter is allocated. The
dashed lines appear both in the CAD as well as on the workpiece.
Administrate laser
parameters

All laser marking systems

"Laser parameters Dotted line" dialog window

Fig. 4-106

Option Continuous lines


Here only continuous lines without dots are output.
Option x Pattern
Here dotted lines are output. The dotted line can be created from
up to six patterns. Each individual pattern is defined by the entered
length of a gap and a line in millimeters. Due to the combination of
different patterns different dotted lines can be defined.
Select "Continuous to end"
The last line of the pattern is continued through to the end to
prevent a gap at the end of the line.

4-132

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Continuous"
With rectangles and polylines the pattern is continuous around the
corners.
Select "Averaging"
The dotted line is distributed along the line (circle, arc of a circle
etc.) that the line starts with the half first dot and also ends with a
half first dot.
The pattern is then stretched or flattened slightly. The lines
therefore always look symmetrical, with circles there is no seam
visible in the pattern. With rectangles or polylines dots always
appear at the corners, therefore two first half dots always meet.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-133

> Laser parameters > Card Sequence


In this dialog window existing parameters can be arranged in
sequence. These are used during output on the workpiece in the
sequence defined here and with the set number of repetitions.
If the sequences are allocated to bitmaps, the gray level depth of
the bitmap object is converted so that it corresponds to the number
of laser parameters contained in the sequence (for example if 16
laser parameters are contained in the sequence, the bitmap is
converted to a 16 gray level bitmap). The first parameter within the
sequence lasers the darkest, the last parameter the lightest points
(gray level). Each pixel of the bitmap is lasered with the laser
parameters corresponding to its gray level.
The setting options in the submenus "Main parameter", "Intern",
"Width" and "Dotted line" are disabled, as these values only apply
to the original parameters and not for sequences. Only the color in
the submenu "Main parameter" can be adjusted.
Administrate laser
parameters

All laser marking systems

"Laser parameters Sequence" dialog window

Fig. 4-107

Available parameters
Here all the individual parameters which occur "In this project" are
contained which can be selected for the sequence.

4-134

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Parameters used
Here the individual parameters used in this sequence are listed,
the number of repetitions is given in brackets at the end of the
name.
Button -->
Adds the current parameter of "Available parameters" to the
sequence with the set repetitions given in "Number".
Button <-Removes the current parameter of the "Parameters used" from the
sequence.
Field "Number"
Changes the repetition number of the selected parameter of the
"Parameters used" from the sequence.
Button Upward
Moves the selected parameter of the "Parameters used" from the
sequence upward by one position.
Button Downward
Moves the selected parameter of the "Parameters used" from the
sequence downwards by one position.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-135

7.4

> Marking field

In this dialog window all settings are performed for administration


of the marking field and for segmentation.

Marking field, optic, segment

Card Marking field, optic

"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window

Fig. 4-108

Group field Representation


Here the optical segmenting settings are shown.
Select "Center lines visible"
This is a setting to define whether center lines of dashes and dots
appear in the marking field to facilitate orientation.
Select "Show segmentation"
The set segmentation areas are displayed as dotted lines.

4-136

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Display segment numbers"


The set segmentation areas are displayed as segment numbers.
The sequence of these numbers and therefore the sequence of the
output can be changed with "Laser" > "Sort Segments".
Group field Units
The unit for entries can be selected either as "inch" or "millimeters".
Group field Optics
If the laser hardware permits, the employed laser optics can be set
here. The size of the marking field changes depending on the
selected optics.
Group field Precision
This is where the general precision of the output can be set. The
set value states the maximum deviation from the set geometry.
Circles, ellipses, circle arcs must be converted during the marking
process into polygon lines. A mathematically correct circle with a
center and radius as defined in CAD is converted into a polygon in
the marking process. The precision parameter states how large the
maximum deviation to the ideal circle can be.
In contrast to the general precision defined here, the context menu
(right mouse button, "Properties") can be used to enter values
which are only valid for this element on the "Laser" card, for
example to apply a very fine resolution to a special circle (see
Fig. 4-99).
Minimum angle
Irrespective of the precision defined in the marking program the
value for circles/arcs of circles is not below the set minimum angle,
for example to avoid large amounts of data.
Maximum angle
Irrespective of the precision defined in the marking program the set
maximum angle for circles/arcs of circles is not exceeded. An entry
of "90 degrees" therefore ensures that even very small circles are
displayed with at least four lines.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-137

Modify circle properties

"Modify circle properties" dialog window

Fig. 4-109

Marking field > Segmented


If the laser hardware permits, the marking field can be divided into
various segments which are individually marked.
This can serve:

To process larger marking fields than is possible with the


optics

Implementing radial marking

The size of the individual segment areas can be specified here.


There are the following categories:

4-138

Unsegmented

Horizontal/vertical

Unbonded rectangles

Cylindric segmented

3D surface

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Cards Segmented Unsegmented


No segmentation takes place here. The marking field defined by
the optics is marked as a whole without segmenting.
Marking field, optic, segment

Segmentation, Unsegmented dialog window

Fig. 4-110

Group field Multihead


The Multihead graphics editor is activated in the "Multihead" group
field.
Master
Head A or B can be defined as master. Drawings are made in the
white marking field of the master. The marking field of the other
head is on a gray background (refer to Section 1.5 "User interface
of CAD with Multihead").
Offset
The field next to the marking field can be shifted with the offset.
Note
The Multihead function can only be activated if it is installed.
Contact the TRUMPF branch office in your country.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-139

Cards Segmented Horizontal/vertical


Segmentation is performed by horizontal/vertical partition of the
marking field.
Marking field, optic, segment

"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window

Fig. 4-111

Group field Segments


Marking field width
If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the
current width can be entered.
Marking field height
If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the
current height can be entered.
Horizontal segmentation
Display of the horizontal segmentation limits can be modified
(values separated with comma or semicolon). The function
"horizontal number" is also adapted accordingly.

4-140

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Horizontal number
The display of the horizontal number of the segmentation areas
can be modified. The function "horizontal segmentation" is
modified accordingly so that the segment areas are regularly
distributed in the marking field.
Vertical segmentation with
Display of the vertical segmentation limits can be modified (values
separated with comma or semicolon). The function "Vertical
number" is also adapted accordingly.
Vertical number
The display of the vertical number of the segmentation areas can
be modified. The function "Vertical segmentation" is modified
accordingly so that the segment areas are regularly distributed in
the marking field.
Number
Number of calculated segments.
Field No.
Segment number to be assigned a relative Z height.
Z height
Relative Z displacement to be assigned to the selected segment.
Group field Sequence
This is where the sequence of the segment output is defined.
Start point
The first output segment is at the bottom left, bottom right, top left
or top right.
Direction
Option horizontal
Starting from the first segment, output is continued horizontally.
Option vertical
Starting from the first segment, output is continued vertically.
Select "Alternating"
The individual lines (horizontal direction) or columns (vertical
direction) are output with an alternating direction.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-141

Button Establish segment limits interactively


The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog
window is closed, the segment limits are displayed as dashes and
can be changed when the mouse pointer is placed on them.
This setting is confirmed by clicking the right mouse button or the
<Enter> key and cancelled with <Esc> or any menu item selection.
Note
This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentation
so that as little geometry as possible is cut and therefore ends in
different segments.
Cards Segmented Unbonded rectangle
Segmentation is performed freely as defined rectangles (parts of
the marking field). Overlapping is possible.
Marking field, optic, segment

"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window

Fig. 4-112

Marking field size


If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the
current size can be entered.

4-142

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Number of fields
Entry of the number of freely definable segmentation areas within
the marking field.
Field No.
Selection of the number of the field for which limits are to be
defined.
Z height
Relative Z displacement to be assigned to the selected segment.
Left, Right, Top, Bottom
Definition of the limits of the currently selected field. Overlapping
within the marking field is possible.
Button Establish segment limits interactively
The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog
window is closed, the segment limits are displayed as dashes and
can be changed by dragging with the mouse when the mouse
pointer is placed on them. This setting is confirmed by clicking the
right mouse button or the <Enter> key and cancelled with <Esc> or
any menu item selection.
Note
This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentation
so that as little geometry as possible is cut and therefore ends in
different segments.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-143

Cards Segmented Cylindric Segmented


If the laser hardware permits, a rotating cylinder can be marked in
individual steps. The current values of the cylinder are entered
here.
Marking field, optic, segment

"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window

Fig. 4-113

Diameter
Entry of the cylinder diameter. The rolled circumference together
with the length results in the overall area of the marking field.
Length
Entry of the cylinder length. The length together with the rolled
circumference results in the overall surface of the marking field.
Rotation steps
Entry of the rotation steps of the cylinder in degrees. The unrolled
part circumference together with the length results in the overall
area of the segmentation field. For example if 300 is entered, the
cylinder is marked in 12 segments.

4-144

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Group field Cylinder position


Definition of whether the cylinder is arranged horizontally or
vertically in order to prepare the geometry accordingly.
Group field Direction of rotation
Definition whether the cylinder is rotated to the left or right.
Select "Equalizing"
The geometry is equalized so that it is adapted to the curve of the
cylinder.
Equalizing precision
This value in drawing units (mm or inch) determines with which
precision the geometry is to be equalized.
Defocusing value
This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states how far defocusing
is in front of the actual processing level of the laser.
With cylinder segmentation of, for example, 45 degrees, eight
segment areas are created. These segment files create an octagon
in cross-section across the cylinder, and the corner points are
positioned exactly on the surface. Therefore when viewed from
above, the exposure plane (segment area) is formed within the
cylinder. The defocus value is the center between the exposure
plane and the surface of the cylinder. To ensure that marking is
performed optimally, the exposure distance on the exposure plane
(segment level) and in the laser parameter the defocus value must
be set to the value calculated here. The focus is positioned exactly
in the center between the exposure plane and cylinder surface so
that the applied force is optimal due to the depth of focus.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Defocus with focus

Fig. 4-114

Laser menu

4-145

Working distance
This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states how far the
maximum elevation of the cylinder section is in front of the actual
processing plane of the laser.
This is, viewed from above, the height from the exposure plane
(segment plane) and the surface of the cylinder (corresponds to
the double defocus value, see above).
Settlement amplitude X/Y
Depending on the setting shows the size of all settlements in the X
and Y direction in the predefined units.
Button Establish segment limits interactively
The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog
window is closed, the segment boundaries are displayed in dashes
and can be changed by pulling them with the mouse after
positioning the mouse pointer on them. The setting is confirmed by
the right mouse button or the <Enter> key. The setting is discarded
with the <Esc> key or by selecting a menu.
Note
This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentations
in order to minimize the number of geometries which are cut and
hence divided into different segments.

4-146

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Cards Segmented 3D Surface (option)


If the laser hardware permits, any 3D Surface can be marked in
individual steps. The required settings are performed in this dialog
window.
Marking field, optic,
segmented

"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window

Fig. 4-115

Button Read in marking area file


Selection of the required file with the 3D area files in XML format.
Steps in Z direction
This value states the number of the individual division steps in the
Z direction. A separate output is performed for each step.
Equalizing precision
This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states with which
precision the geometry is equalized.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-147

7.5

> Sort

All objects with the same laser parameter are combined for output
on the laser marking system. In this submenu the sequence can be
sorted in which the individual laser parameters are processed. This
can be useful to optimize time-intensive settings on the laser
hardware.
Sort objects

"Sort objects" dialog window

Fig. 4-116

Option Sort all objects


All objects of the drawing are sorted.
Option Sort marked objects only
Only the marked objects in the drawing are sorted.
Option Increasing with laser output
The individual laser parameters are sorted according to increasing
laser output.

4-148

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Decreasing with laser output


The individual laser parameters are sorted according to decreasing
laser output.
Option Not according to laser output
The laser output does not play a role in sorting.
Option Increasing with focussing
The individual laser parameters are sorted according to increasing
focussing.
Option Decreasing with focussing
The individual laser parameters are sorted according to decreasing
focussing.
Option Not according to focussing
Focussing does not play a role in sorting.
Option Increasing with Z offset
The individual laser parameters are sorted according to an
increasing Z offset value.
Option Decreasing with Z offset
The individual laser parameters are sorted according to a
decreasing Z offset value.
Option Not according to Z offset
The Z offset value does not play a role in sorting.
Option Priority low
The corresponding property has a lower priority during output, i.e.
sorting is first performed in accordance with the other features.
Sorting is performed within the created output group according to
this feature only in the end.
Option Priority medium
The corresponding property has a medium priority during output,
i.e. sorting is first performed in accordance with the property with
the highest priority. Then sorting is performed within the created
output group according to this property.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-149

Option Priority high


The corresponding property has a high priority during output, i.e.
sorting is first performed in accordance with this property. Then
sorting is performed within the created output group according to
other properties.
Select "According to shortest path"
During output the objects are optimized according to the shortest
path. The other criteria are then taken into account accordingly.
Select "Also sort group contents"
Pre-defined groups (also called "Library elements" or "Blocks") can
be either sorted with their individual elements or not taken into
account during sorting, if they are already optimized.
Button "Sort interactively"
The sorting sequence appears marked with small numbers on the
respective object. These numbers can be shifted on the object for
more clarity.
The automatically suggested sequence can be recompiled by
clicking the individual objects with the mouse.
To this purpose hold down the <Shift> key and touch the required
object with the mouse pointer. As soon as the mouse pointer is on
the object, the corresponding sorting number jumps to the mouse
pointer. When the <Shift> key is released, the position remains
saved.
This action is confirmed by the right mouse button or the <Enter>
key, it is cancelled with the <Esc> key or any menu selection.

4-150

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.6

> Generate object matrix

In this submenu it is possible to make multiple chessboard-like


copies of objects. The contained variables can be copied and
renamed, also if the values differ. In case of a variable "Read from
file" the parameter variables "Start value" and "Step width" are
adjusted accordingly (refer to Section 7.7 "> Variables").
Generate matrix of objects

"Generate matrix of objects" dialog window

Fig. 4-117

Group field Parameter


Distance horizontal
The distance of object group to object group in X direction (in
millimeters). At first the outer limitation in X direction of all objects
is displayed.
Distance vertical
The distance of object group to object group in Y direction (in
millimeters). At first the outer limitation in Y direction of all objects
is displayed.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-151

Number horizontal
Number of object groups in X direction.
Number vertical
Number of object groups in Y direction.
Select "Center Objects"
The object groups are positioned in center from the center of the
drawing surface.
Group field Choose variables which have to be counted up
In this selection list it is possible to mark the variables which are
counted up in the objects when copying them. Multiple selection is
possible.
Group field Sorting
Option First row, then column
The object groups are sorted in this order.
Option First column, then row
The object groups are sorted in this order.
Option First row, then column, then column up/down alternate
The object groups are sorted in this order.
Option First column, then row, then row left/right alternate
The object groups are sorted in this order.

4-152

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.7

> Variables

Variables can be defined in this submenu which are used in a


drawing project in order to insert current data during execution of
the marking program with the laser. The menu changes in
accordance with the selected data origin.
Administrate list of variables

The variables and their properties are saved in the drawing.

"Administrate variable list" dialog window

Fig. 4-118

Group field Properties of Number


Variable list field
Lists already defined variables.
Button New variable
Creates a new variable.
Button Remove variable
Deletes an existing and selected variable.
Data origin
Defines the data source from where the variables are given their
values.
Interactively
During execution of the marking program a prompt for the variable
text appears in a dialog box.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-153

From file
During execution of the marking program the variable text is read
out from a file.
Here the file name must be given with the path, the line number of
the file at which the first variable value changes and the step for
determining the next value (Start value: 10, step: 2 therefore
means: The variable values are in the lines: 10, 12, 14, 16 etc.).
Also determines the behavior when the final value is reached.
COM object
When the marking program is executed, the variable text from a
COM object is made available. The COM object is identified by the
'Modulname.Klassenname' or by '{ID-Number}'.
The COM object must have the interface "IVariableManager" from
'VariableManager.tlb'.
The interface comprises two functions:

HRESULT InitializeVariable(BSTR Identifier,[out,retval]BSTR*


NewVal) Supplies the first value of the variable identifier as a
string.

HRESULT SetNextValue(BSTR Identifier, BSTR LastVal,


[out,retval]BSTR* NewVal) Supplies the next value of the
variable identifier as a string.

The parameter "LastVal" contains the last value of the variables.

4-154

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Serial number
The variable text is issued as serial number during the execution of
the marking program. The initial value, the increment from one
serial number to the next one, the final value and the procedure
after reaching the final value are defined. Furthermore several
objects can be linked in a marking file with a serial number variable
("Increment within project / marking file" checkbox). Objects obtain
the following values with only one defined variable.

Four text fields with one variable

Fig. 4-119

Code word
During execution of the marking program the variable text of
constants, a code word or a previously created variable is
generated. In this case several objects (code words, constants,
variables) are combined. The date and time can for example be
used as code words.
The required data origin can be selected from the code word list
and inserted into the complete text with "OK". The selected code
words then accumulate (in curved brackets). Formatting can be
changed there individually.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-155

Example: Define variable with code word "modulo"

"Administrate variable list" dialog window

Fig. 4-120

Open submenu "Variables".


Click button "New variable".
Dialog window "Define new variable" opens.
Type the name of the variable in the text field: e.g."Test".
Select the entry "Code word" for the variable "Test" from the
drop-down list field "Data origin".
Select e.g. "modulo10" in the drop-down list field "Code word"
and click button "Paste".
"modulo10@(varname)" appears in the text field "Complete
text".
Select the variable, e.g. "Time" according to the same
procedure.
In text field "Complete text" replace the term "varname" by the
variable "Time".
Confirm all entries with "OK".

4-156

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Function call
When the marking program is executed, the variable text from
a program function is made available. First the name of the DLL
with the path must be given, then the function name inside the
DLL.
The declaration of the function must have the following form:

'int CALLBACK [Functionname](wchar_t*, wchar_t*,int*)';

Example:

int CALLBACK SetVariableValue(BSTR VariableName,BSTR


buffer,int* maxSize);

The parameter "VariableName" contains the identifier of the


variables. "buffer" supplies the memory to accommodate the
values of the variables as a string. "maxSize" is the maximum
length of the string which the buffer can accommodate.
If "maxSize" is too small, "maxSize" must be set to the necessary
size and the return value of the function is set to 0. Then a second
call occurs with a correspondingly large "buffer". If the variable
value is set successfully, the return value of the function states the
number of the copied characters. "VariableName" and "buffer" are
allocated by LaserCAD and also released once more.
External source
During execution of the marking program the variable text is
generated from a predefined external source.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-157

7.8

> Hatch styles

Hatch styles can be defined in this submenu which can be


assigned to drawing elements with closed edges from the "Draw"
menu (refer to Section 6.10 "> Hatching") or from the context menu
(refer to Section 2.2 "Change objects" > "Context menu").
Administrate hatching

"Administrate hatching" dialog window

Fig. 4-121

Option Lines
Hatching is performed with lines.
Option Equidistant
Hatching is performed with equidistants.
Option Spirals
The hatching is spiral-shaped.
Line spacing
Setting of the spacing of the hatching lines from one another.
Margin distance
Setting of the distance of the hatching from the edging.
Shading angle
Setting of the angle at which the hatching lines are entered.

4-158

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Angle increment
If the number of hatchings (see below) is greater than "1", a setting
can be made here at which angle difference the following
hatching(s) are entered.
Example:
Angle increment: 90 and number of hatchings: 2 creates
chessboard hatching.
Number of hatchings
Entry of the number of separate hatchings which can be turned or
inserted by the value of the angle increment.
Select "Alternating"
The individual hatchings are inserted alternately for path
optimization in each case.
Select "Line by line"
The individual hatching lines are marked line by line over the whole
marking field. If this option is not activated, each object is marked
one after the other.
Button New
Defining a new hatching style. The entered name appears in the
display area and can be modified as described.
Button Delete
Deletes the currently selected hatching style in the left display
window.
Button Save
Saves the currently selected hatching style in the left display
window. This is available for following projects.

7.9

> Font Editor

The Font Editor is a separate program section and is described in


more detail in Section 8 "Font Editor".

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-159

7.10 > Sort segments


When this function is activated, the current sorting sequence of the
segments of the marking field defined previously in the submenu
"Marking field" > "Segmented" (also refer to the Section 7.4 "Laser
menu" > "Marking field") appears. The sequence is depicted by
numbers in the center of the respective segment. The respective
sequence can be changed by clicking the individual segments with
the mouse.
This action is confirmed by clicking with the right mouse button or
the <Enter> key, it is cancelled with the <Esc> key or any menu
selection.

Numbering of the sorted segments

4-160

Laser menu

Fig. 4-122

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.11 > Project data


In this submenu changes to the marking program can be logged.
Project data

"Projectdata" dialog window

Fig. 4-123

Author
Name of the project author.
Created on
Date of creation of the project which is automatically taken from the
system.
Title
A project title can be given.
Button New change
The author and the commentary of a new modification of the
program can be entered.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-161

Project change information

"Project change information" dialog window

Fig. 4-124

Time window
Here the date and time of the changes made with "New change"
are defined.

7.12 > Pilot laser on/off


The pilot laser option is described in Chapter 2. The pilot laser can
directly be switched on or off from CAD.

7.13 > Marking


During the step > Marking laser radiation is emitted
from the lens!
WARNING

Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent


damage to your eyes.

If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear


laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for
the wavelength of the laser radiation.

Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece.

Never look into the lens.

Initiates a quick output of the existing drawing to the marking


device for test purposes.
If no object has been selected in the drawing, the entire drawing is
marked. If objects have been selected, only these are output.

4-162

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

7.14 > Navigator


The navigator option is described in Chapter 2.
The navigator helps the operator to promptly find, adjust, and
optimize the appropriate laser parameters for the marking task.

7.15 > Focus test


Press the "Focus test" icon and the following "Focus test" dialog
window opens.
The standard values are displayed in the fields "Number of values"
and "Max/Min value" and visualized in the CAD. The "Max/Min
value" depends on the laser type.

Focus test dialog window

Fig. 4-125

Click "Preview" and mark the preview in the CAD with a mouse
click. Then a value will be displayed in the "Optimal focus" field.
Confirm the value with "OK". Also confirm the following message
with "Yes":

Focus test message

Fig. 4-126

The optimal focus of the Z axis is now set. The Z_offset can be set
alike.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Laser menu

4-163

7.16 > Slow hatch as area


This function can be set according to Section 9 "Menu Extras
> Options > Card Objects Hatching" (also refer to page 4-225).
After clicking the icon, you can display a hatched area as an area.
This procedure is described in Chapter 2, Section 3.7
FastBitmapMarking.

4-164

Laser menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

8.

Font Editor

This submenu opens the separate Font Editor program Section in


which fonts are selected, defined and modified.
The Font Editor permits new definition of fonts or reading in of
existing TrueType fonts. The fonts generated in this way are given
special parameters and can then be used for laser marking.
If a font is unavailable in the current system, a dialog window
opens and indicates the font not found. Then you are requested to
select another font.
Structure of the user
interface

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

The user interface of the Font Editor comprises the menu bar (1),
the tool bar (2), the drawing field (3), the list field for font selection
(4) and an area with the drawing properties (5).

Font Editor

4-165

1 Menu bar

4 List field

2 Tool bar

5 Drawing properties

3 Drawing field
"Font Editor" dialog window

4-166

Font Editor

Fig. 4-127

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Menu bar

The pull-down menus can be opened from the menu bar and used
to manage work with the CAD and control the drawing.
The following menus are provided:

File

Edit

View

Font

? (Help)

These menus are available for accessing all functions of the Font
Editor. Some of these functions can also be activated with buttons
from the tool bar.
The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or by using
the keyboard, as described for the CAD user interface (also refer to
Section 1.4 "User interface for CAD").
Tool bar

The tool bar provides fast access to various file operations (e.g.
"open" and "save") and functions for creating and editing drawings.

Tool bar

Fig. 4-128

Font selection

The left list field displays the entire defined range of the selected
font with its Unicode number. A character for editing can be selected and placed in the drawing field by double-clicking.

Font display

In the center area of this window the font selected on the left is
displayed (if applicable with the filling lines). It can be modified
here.
New fonts are also created in the drawing field.

Properties and actions

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

On the right either the properties of the character or font or entry


fields for creating and modifying characters are located (so-called
actions).

Font Editor

4-167

8.1

File menu

Pull-down file menu

Fig. 4-129

> New
Serves to create a new font. The required characters must then be
defined.
A dialog window appears in which the properties of the font can be
defined (refer to Section 8.3 "View menu" > "Properties of the
font").

4-168

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Properties of the font

"Properties of the font" dialog window

Fig. 4-130

> Open
For opening a new font.

Open

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Open file dialog window

Fig. 4-131

Font Editor

4-169

Fonts are saved as laserfont files (file name extension: '.lfn'). All
laserfont files are automatically saved in a folder which can be
defined in the registration database.
> Import TXF file
Imports a TXF font. This can be saved in TruTops Mark format
'.lfn' and is then available to the TruTops Mark program package.
Open

Import TXF file dialog window

4-170

Font Editor

Fig. 4-132

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Import font

Proceed as follows:
In the Font Editor open the required font and save it in *.TXF
format.
Copy the file to disk or to a network drive if available.
Now you can import the font in the Font Editor with the "Import
TXF file" function.
Then save the font under C:\TruMark\Fonts\Filename.vlf.
After import, individual characters can be modified as described
below.
Font size
Defines the size of the character set. The value set here states the
height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters are
drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The height
set here should, however not be exceeded, to prevent the
characters touching or overlapping.
Note
In TruTops Mark the marking can be enlarged or reduced as
required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted
effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is
better for each required character size to create a separate font, if
this is to be available in filled form.
Spacing
Sets the spacing between the individual characters.
Select "Use OemToAnsi"
Depending on the definition of the fonts, it can be useful to switch
the OemToAnsi conversion table on or off, for example for special
characters.
> Import TrueType
Imports a TrueType font. The TrueType font is extended by other
necessary definitions which are necessary for laser output and
which can then be saved in TruTops Mark format ('.lfn').

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-171

After import individual characters can be modified.


Import TrueType font

"Import TTF" dialog window

Fig. 4-133

Font selection list field


Permits the selection of a font from all TrueType fonts
Select "Bold/Italic"
Setting of the font style of the selected font.
Select "Kerning"
Permits the setting of a proportional font. In this case the distance
between the characters is variable between the respective
character spacings (kerning).
Size
Setting of the size of the selected font. The value set here states
the height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters
are drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The
height set here should not be exceeded, to prevent the characters
touching or overlapping.

4-172

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Note
In TruTops Mark the marking can be enlarged or reduced as
required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted
effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is
better for each required character size to create a separate font, if
this is to be available in filled form.
Resolution
The roundings (splines) of the true type fonts are defined with
polygons (vectors). Here, the exactness of the resolution is
defined. The inputted value in millimeters determines the
maximum deviation of the polygon approximation from the
original splines. If the resolution is too high, the laser marking is
slowed down and no longer homogeneous due to too many single
vectors.
Select "Contour"
This function sets whether the outer contour of the true type is part
of the character or whether it is only represented by the filling.
Distance
Defines the distances of the generated contour inwards towards to
the original true type border in millimeters. This distance is used to
take into account the width of a laser line.
Select "Hatching"
Determines whether the selected true type font is to have a filling.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-173

Option Line filling


The filling is made with lines.

Line filling

4-174

Font Editor

Fig. 4-134

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Equidistant
The filling is made with equidistants of the edge which are drawn
based on the edge.

Equidistants

Fig. 4-135

Filling Lines spacing


The filling lines spacing depends on the width of a laser line on the
workpiece and should be selected so that there is no noteworthy
overlapping, but also no gaps. It can be modified later for individual
characters.
Filling lines angle
The filling lines angle defines the predefined angle of the filling
lines during line filling. It can be modified later for individual
characters.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-175

Filling margin distance


The filling margin distance determines how far from the outside
contour the individual filling lines end to take the width of the laser
line into account and to prevent "overburning" of the outside
contour. It can be modified later for individual characters.
Select "Alternating filling lines"
Alternating filling lines can be set as filling lines for path
optimization.
Select "Margin prior to filling"
The margin is drawn before the filling.
> Save
Saves and registers the edited laser font.
If no target folder and name are defined, this is asked for here. A
special folder is preset if this is stated in the registration database.
As a file name extension 'lfn' (for laser font) is suggested.
> Save as
Saves the edited laser font under a special name.
This is where the target directory and the name is defined. A
special folder is preset if this is stated in the registration database.
As a file name extension 'lfn' (for laser font) is suggested.

4-176

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Registered fonts


Opens a dialog window in which previously registered, i.e. saved
fonts are shown. Fonts can be opened or deregistered for
subsequent editing.
Registered fonts

"Registered fonts" dialog window

Using fonts on another laser

Fig. 4-136

If you wish to use new or modified fonts on another laser, the


following steps must be performed:
Save the new font on the disk and copy these into the target
laser in the folder C:\TruMark\Fonts\Fontname.vlf.
Register the font by opening and then saving in the Font
Editor.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-177

> Print fonts


This opens the print dialog of the Font Editor where the currently
selected font (displayed in the font field) can be printed.

Print section

"Print section" dialog window

Fig. 4-137

Option Entire drawing, format filling


The drawing, i.e. the current font, is depicted on the paper in the
most format filling manner. The necessary scale is displayed under
"Scale 1:xxx".
Option Current picture section, format filling
The set picture section is printed so that the format is filled. The
page aspect ratio is adapted so that no area of the picture section
is omitted. The printed picture section can therefore be larger than
shown in the drawing field.
Note
The selection "Current picture section, format filling" refers to the
section shown in the dialog for "Print section". At the beginning this
section is identical to the current view of the drawing. After a zoom
action within the dialog, however, the section shown in the dialog
changes.

4-178

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Fixed scale


Here a fixed scale can be entered. A frame appears on the drawing
on the screen which symbolizes the paper size. This frame can be
picked and moved as required on the drawing in order to print any
section of the drawing in the set scale.
Paper size
Shows the currently set paper size in "Printer setup" on which the
views and scale calculations in this dialog are based.
Button Printer setup
Opens the print dialog of your printer in which settings can be
made. Decisive in this case is the set paper size and the format
(portrait/landscape).
Number
Defines the number of copies required.
Representation window
In the left-hand side of this dialog there is a representation window
which also permits interactive actions. It serves to display and
influence the current print area.
The representation of the drawing (or the drawing section) and the
print area (as frame) can be influenced by three functions.
Button Overview
The entire drawing is shown in the window. The print area can be
moved on the drawing by pressing within the marked edging.
Button Paper
The paper area is shown. The print area can be moved with the
mouse pointer in the drawing as required.
Button Zoom
Any section of the drawing can be selected by pulling a rectangle
with the mouse pointer in the image window. The print area can
then be moved with the mouse pointer in the drawing as required.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-179

Button Print
Starts printing.
> Print
The active font should be printed. This opens the print dialog of
your printer. If the printable area is smaller than the page size of
the complete character set, the print-out is spread over several
pages (from left to right, from top to bottom).
When these pages are put together, they feature the entire
character set. The current division of the sheet on the print pages
can be viewed with the "Page preview" menu item.
> Page preview
Opens the page preview which shows how the drawing is output
on the printer. You open an image in which you can zoom and in
the case of several print pages scroll through the individual pages.
> Printer setup
Opens the setup dialog of your printer in which various print
settings are made, depending on the installed printer.

4-180

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

8.2

Edit menu

Pull-down edit menu

Fig. 4-138

> Undo
The last ten actions can be undone.
> Cut
Marked sections of the current drawing can be cut out and moved
to the clipboard.
They can be reinserted when a new character is created. This
function is useful for creating similar characters.
> Copy
Marked sections of the current character can be copied and moved
to the clipboard.
They can be reinserted when a new character is created. This
function is useful for creating similar characters.
> Paste
CAD objects on the clipboard can be inserted into the text box of
the current character. These can be parts of a similar character
which have been pasted to the clipboard with "Edit" > "Copy/Cut".
With very complex characters it can also be objects which are
created with the CAD.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-181

8.3

View menu

Pull-down view menu

Fig. 4-139

> Tool bar


Switches the display of the tool bar on and off.
> Status line
Switches the display of the status line at the bottom of the screen
on and off.

Status line

4-182

Font Editor

Fig. 4-140

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> Select section


Activates the zoom function. It is then possible to open a rectangle
with the mouse pointer in the character field which defines the
zoom area.
> Whole character
When this function is selected, the entire font box is displayed.
> Properties of the font
Opens a dialog window in which the properties of the selected font
can be displayed and modified.
Properties of the font

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

"Properties of the font" dialog window

Fig. 4-141

Font Editor

4-183

Short name
Name of the character set.
Description
Permits the entry of a description of the font. This can afterwards
be viewed again with the properties of the character set.
Group field Dimensions
Select "Fixed character spacing"
Defines whether the character spacing varies (proportional font) or
whether it should be output with fixed spacing. If proportional font
is selected, it can be determined whether this character set should
be set to a fixed character spacing.
Font size
Defines the size of the character set. The value set here states the
height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters are
drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The height
set here should, however, not be exceeded, to prevent the characters touching or overlapping.
Note

In TruTops Mark the marking can be enlarged or reduced as


required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted
effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is
better for each required character size to create a separate font, if
this is to be available in filled form.
Baseline height
Stipulates the position of the baseline from the bottom edge of the
font box in millimeters. The baseline is depicted as a horizontal line
and is the lower limit for all characters without descender.
If subsequently when working in TruTops Mark the reference
point of the text is set to this baseline, the text can be placed on a
set line without problems.
Width
With non-proportional character sets stipulates the character
spacing.
Left margin
With non-proportional character sets stipulates the left margin next
to the character.

4-184

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Right margin
With non-proportional character sets stipulates the right margin
next to the character.
Ascender
Stipulates the position of a dashed orientation line for the ascender
(presetting: position of the cross-line on the large "T").
X height
Stipulates the position of a dotted orientation line for the height of
the small characters (presetting: length of the top edge of the
small "x").
Descender
Stipulates the position of a dotted orientation line for the descender
of characters (presetting: length of the bottom edge of the
small "j").
Group field Grid
Horizontal
Setting of the horizontal grid dimension for drawing a new
character. If the grid is activated, it is displayed as gray points in
the font box, the ends of lines jump to these points.
The resolution of the characters can also be influenced.
Vertical
Setting of the vertical grid dimension for drawing a new character.
If the grid is activated, it is displayed as gray points in the font box,
line ends jump to these points.
The resolution of the characters can therefore be influenced by this
grid setting.
Distance from left
If the character spacing should not be within the grid dimension on
the left, a separate value can be entered here. The distance to the
bottom is automatically selected so that the grid runs through the
baseline.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-185

Standard font
The set character appears if a character is requested which is not
defined in this character set. The standard character can be
entered or defined with its Unicode number (0x41).
Background font
The set character appears as a background if a new character is to
be created. Similarities or width/height ratios can be adjusted. The
background character can be entered or defined with its Unicode
number (0x41).
Group field Scaling
Select "Keep page aspect ration"
Stipulates whether the past aspect ratio will be kept during drawing.
X factor
With previously defined character sets a factor can be given for the
X expansion.
Width
With previously defined character sets a standard value can be
given for the width.
Y factor
With previously defined character sets a factor can be given for the
Y expansion.
Height
With previously defined character sets a standard value can be
given for the height.

4-186

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

8.4

Font menu

Font menu

Fig. 4-142

> Mark
Permits changes to a selected character with geometric modifications.
The possible actions appear in the right-hand window of the user
interface.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-187

Action marking

If a mouse pointer is positioned above a markable object, it


changes shape. The respective object is activated by clicking with
the left mouse button it is then in a dotted frame.

Action marking

Fig. 4-143

If whole parts of the drawing are to be activated, a frame can be


opened (press left mouse button, hold down, move, release). All
objects which are contained completely within the frame are then
marked.
If several such marking actions are to be combined, the marking
actions can be accumulated before marking by holding down the
<Ctrl> or <Strg> key. During a new marking operation the
previously marked objects remain active, the new ones are added.
Button Delete marked objects
The marked objects are deleted.
Button Mark all objects
All objects of the selected character are automatically marked to
modify the whole character.

4-188

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

With the aid of the buttons at the top the following modifications
can be made to the marked objects.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Drag

Rotate

Scale

Font Editor

4-189

Drag
The marked lines of the selected character are shifted.

Action drag

First click one point of the selected objects and then click any other
shifting point. The points are aligned and define the shift. It is useful to activate the jump function.

Action drag

Fig. 4-144

Shifting of the objects can also be performed by entering the


coordinates in the input fields "Horizontal" and "Vertical".
The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom
corner of the font box.
Select "Copy"
A copy of the selected objects is created and shifted, the original
objects are retained.

4-190

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Rotate
The selected objects are rotated.

Action rotate

First click a point around which the selected objects are to be


turned. Then click two other points which define the rotation (angle
between Line > Fixed point > 1st point and line > Fixed point > 2nd
point). It can be useful to activate the jump function.

Action rotate

Fig. 4-145

The rotation of the objects can also be performed by entering the


coordinates in the input fields.
The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand, bottom
corner of the font box.
Select "Copy"
A copy of the selected objects is created and rotated, the original
objects are retained.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-191

Scaling
The selected objects are scaled.

Action scaling

First click a point from which the selected objects are to be scaled
as a fixed point (this point remains unchanged during scaling).
Then click two additional points which define scaling so that the
selected objects are enlarged, reduced and distorted so that both
points align. It can be useful to activate the jump function.

Action scaling

Fig. 4-146

The rotation of the objects can also be performed by entering the


coordinates in the input fields.
The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom
corner of the font box.

4-192

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Option Proportional
The form of the selected objects remains, the size factor determines scaling.
Option Distort
The form of the selected objects is distorted, as different size
factors can be used for horizontal and vertical scaling.
Select "Copy"
A copy of the selected objects is created and scaled, the original
objects are retained.
> Draw polyline
Permits the extension of the selected character by insertion of lines
or line paths.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Draw polyline

Fig. 4-147

Font Editor

4-193

A polyline can be drawn in the coordinate fields point by point by


clicking with the mouse button or entering from the keyboard.
A point is defined by pressing the <Enter> key.
Activation of grids and jumps facilitates this activity.
The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom
corner of the font box.
Select "Closed"
The drawn polyline is closed, a connection will therefore be
established from the current point to the starting point.
Button New line
The current line is concluded and a new one starts with the next
entry.
Button Exit
The current line is closed and the "Draw lines" mode is exited.
> Change polyline
With this it is possible to change a line or several lines of the
selected character.

Change polyline

4-194

Font Editor

Fig. 4-148

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

The intersection of the polylines appear in the font field. The center
of all individual lines is marked with an additional, smaller point, a
so-called hotspot (intermediate point). The lines can be modified by
pulling the intersections and the hotspots.
Clicking a hotspot activates this for the entry of the coordinates in
the entry fields.
Variation of a hotspot divides the previous individual line into two
lines and therefore serves to refine forms.
Activating the grid facilitates this activity.
The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom corner of the font box.

Close polyline

Fig. 4-149

Select "Closed"
The drawn polyline is closed, a connection will therefore be
established from the current point to the starting point.
Button Delete points
A point activated with the left mouse button is deleted.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-195

> Fill
Permits filling of the selected character.

Fill

Fig. 4-150

Line distance
Setting of the distance of the hatching lines from one another. It is
based on the filling width of the laser.
Line angle
Setting of the angle of the hatching lines.
Margin distance
Setting of the margin distance, i.e. the distance of the hatching
lines to the edge of the character.
Select "Alternating directions"
Alternating hatching lines can be set here for path optimization.
Button Execute
Starts hatching. The complicated calculation can take some time.

4-196

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> CAD
Opens the CAD for the selected character and permits use of all
CAD functions.

User interface CAD

Fig. 4-151

The menu "File" > "Exit" closes the CAD and returns to the Font
Editor.
Any existing arcs of circles are dissolved. Therefore parameters for
this resolution are requested in a dialog window.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-197

Precision for CAD import

"Precision for CAD import" dialog window

Fig. 4-152

Precision
Defines by which maximum value in millimeters the line dissolution
may deviate from the original element. A value which is too low
creates a large number of lines, a value which is too low possibly
visible corners.
Smallest angle for arcs
Defines a lower limit for angle dissolution irrespective of the values
entered under "Precision".
Largest angle for arcs
Defines a top limit for angle dissolution irrespective of the values
set under "Precision", for example to depict circles below the
precision limits with the angle "90" at least as a square.
Select "Stop displaying this dialog"
The current settings for this session are taken and not requested
during the next operation.
Button Do not accept

The changes in the character in the TruTops Mark system are not
accepted. They are in the Font Editor with the original character.

Button Accept
The changes in the character in the TruTops Mark system are
accepted. They are in the Font Editor with the changed character.

4-198

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

> New character


Permits editing of a new character.

New character

"New character" dialog window

Fig. 4-153

A standard character can be typed in or defined with its Unicode


number (0x45).

Properties dialog field

Fig. 4-154

In the dialog field the properties of the selected character appear.


Left margin
Defines the distance of the character from the left-hand margin of
the font box. This distance defines the distance to the previous
character in a text. If the character extends over this edge, the
entry is negative. This character then protrudes into the text box of
the previous character (if provided).

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Font Editor

4-199

Font width
Shows the font width as a maximum horizontal expansion of the
geometry. This value cannot be changed.
Right margin
Defines the distance of the character from the right-hand margin of
the font box. This distance defines the distance to the following
character in a text. If the character extends over this edge, the
entry is negative. This character then protrudes into the text box of
the following character (if provided).
Select "Standard font"
Makes the selected character the standard character which
appears if a character is requested which is not defined in this
character set.
Select "Background font"
Puts the selected character into the background if a new character
is to be created. Similarities or width/height ratios can be adjusted.
> Jump
Activates the jump function to facilitate drawing of new lines.

> Grid
Activates the "Properties of the font" and displays it in the font field
to facilitate drawing of new lines.

4-200

Font Editor

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

8.5

Help

> Index
This menu entry opens the index of the Font Editor help system
and opens the respective help file.
> Copyright
Opens a menu window with information on the Font Editor version.

9.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

Tools menu

Fig. 4-155

Tools menu

4-201

9.1

> Layers

Each object is in a defined layer (also refer to Section 4.8 "Edit


menu" > "Properties"). With this dialog window drawing elements
(dimensions, auxiliary lines, lettering etc.) can be shown and
hidden, which ensures enhanced clarity.
Layer management

"Layer management" dialog window

Fig. 4-156

Layers are managed on the basis of their names. The current list of
the available layers appears in a list field. Here layers can be
selected. When a drawing is opened, all layers it contains are
listed.
Button New
Opens a dialog window in which a new layer can be created.
This is where a name is assigned and also defined

4-202

Whether the layer is to be displayed

Whether it can be picked from

Whether it should be printed (lasered)

Whether it shall be replaced by the block layer.

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Define new layer

Each layer can also be assigned a color. If on the setting the color
"from layer" has been set, all newly inserted objects are printed on
a printer in the set color.

"Define new layer" dialog window

Fig. 4-157

Button Modify
Opens a dialog window in which an existing layer can be modified.
Here it can be selected how the layer should react to certain
actions.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

The layer is displayed

Picking is possible on this layer

This layer is printed (lasered)

Is replaced by block layer

Tools menu

4-203

Button Delete
Deletes the layer selected in the list field.
Button List becomes standard
Saves the current list of the layers from the list field in registration,
previously saved data is overwritten. The standard list created in
this way is available for subsequent projects.
Button Add from standard
Adds all settings of the saved standard list to the existing list of
layers.
Button Add from drawing
Adds all available layers of the current drawing into the layer list,
also layers from imported layers or drawing elements inserted from
the clipboard.
Button Removed unused
Removes all layers which are not used in the current drawing.
Note
The functions for selecting and administration of layers can also be
selected from the tool bar. To this purpose click "Layer administration".

1 Administrate layers

2 Actual layer
Fig. 4-158

4-204

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

9.2

> Measurement type

This submenu is used to determine and modify measurement


types.
Measurement type
management

"Measurement type management" dialog window

Fig. 4-159

Measurement types are managed on the basis of their names. The


current list of the available measurement types appears in a list
field. One measurement type can be selected. When a drawing is
opened, all previously defined measurement types are listed.
Button New
Opens a dialog window in which a new measurement type can be
created.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-205

Dimensioning parameters

Here a name is assigned.


The following properties can be defined:

"Dimensioning parameters" dialog window

Fig. 4-160

Card Geometry
Distance and overhang of the measurement lines from the drawing
object.
The following is defined here:

Whether auxiliary lines should be drawn on the drawing object


at right angles to the measurement lines

Whether these end at a distance from the drawing object or


overhang

Whether the measurement line between the text should be


interrupted

At which distance the text is positioned above the measurement line

Whether a square should be drawn around the measurement


line text

Which distance this square should have from the text

Card Symbol
The following is defined here:

4-206

Whether dimensioning should be positioned inside or outside


closed lines

Which symbol (e.g. open or closed arrow, circle) is used for dimensioning

How large the respective symbol is to be displayed in the


drawing

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Measurement text


Defines the various parameters of the measurement text such as
the displayed precision, a possible text in front of and after the
measurement number, a scaling factor of this text and the text size.
Also permits the selection of options such as whether the text
should be positioned outside the mass objects, whether the mass
text is rotated (by 90 or 60 degrees or automatically), and whether
inside or outside text is always horizontal.
Card 2nd Text
Permits the output of a second measurement in a different unit.
Card Tolerances
Permits the definition of tolerance values by which deviation from
the measurement number is possible.
Card Validity
Defines for which measurement types dimensioning is valid (e.g.
point dimensioning, coordinate dimensioning, angle dimensioning
etc.).
Card Color
Permits allocation of colors for measurement lines, auxiliary lines
and dimensioning symbols.
Card Options
The following is defined here:

Which coordinate system is used (global coordinates or coordinates of the current drawing)

In which form angle dimensioning should be displayed

Whether radii measurements should always be depicted horizontally (bent)

Card Font
Defines the font (depending on the fonts available on the
respective computer), the typeface (normal, italics, bold) and the
color of the measurement texts.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-207

Button Modify
Opens a dialog window in which an existing measurement type can
be modified.
The properties which can be changed correspond to those
described in the section "New".
Button Delete
Deletes the measurement type selected in the list field.
Button List becomes standard
Saves the current list of the measurement types from the list field
in registration, previously saved data is overwritten. The standard
list created in this way is available for subsequent projects.
Button Add from standard
All settings of the list saved as standard are added to the existing
list of measurement types.
Button Add from drawing
All measurement types of the current drawing are inserted into the
list, therefore also the measurement types of imported drawing
parts or those inserted from the clipboard.
Button Remove unused
Only the measurement types appear in the list which can also be
used in the current drawing.
Button For new objects
The currently set measurement type of the list is used as the basis
for all newly inserted objects and appears in the respective list field
of the tool bar.

4-208

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

9.3
Color list management

> Colors

In this sub-menu, the colors used in CAD are managed.

"Color list management" dialog window

Fig. 4-161

Color types are managed on the basis of their names. The current
list of available colors appears in a list field, one color can be
selected. When a drawing is opened, all previously defined colors
are listed.
Button New
Opens a dialog window in which a name can be assigned for the
new color. This appears in the list of color names. When the
required color is clicked in the right-hand section of the dialog
window, this is assigned to the color name.
Button Delete
Deletes the selected color from the list.
Button Define
Opens a dialog window in which a new combined color can be
defined. The color is then provided in the fields of the user-defined
colors.
If a previously defined color has been changed, this can be marked
in the list field and then selected as the required new color in the
right-hand part of the dialog window.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-209

9.4

> Grid

In the CAD the drawing can be given a background grid. The grid
is not output, it only serves for orientation and exact drawing, as
with an active grid all drawn objects must be jumped on grid points.
The grid can be switched on and off in the "Tools" submenu with
the option "Grid active".
Grid and local coordinate
system

This submenu is used to determine and modify grids.

"Grid and local coordinate system" dialog window

Fig. 4-162

Group field Grid


Option Template/Global coordinates
States which coordinate system the grid values are based on.
Horizontal distance
The horizontal grid distance.
Vertical distance
The vertical grid distance.

4-210

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Represent grid"


Activation and deactivation of the defined grid.
Min. pixel spacing
With small grid spacing the screen can be covered with the grid.
Here the minimum pixel spacing of the grid representation is set, if
the value is not reached, only each 10th grid line is represented.
Option Points
The grid is represented by points.
Option Lines
The grid is represented by lines.
Option Cross
The grid is represented by small crosses.
Group field Local coordinate system
In order to be able to work flexibly with the CAD, it is possible to
change the position and value of the coordinate system during a
session, for example to adapt to workpiece demands.
When this option has been activated, two arrows appear on the
drawing area at the previous origin. If the mouse pointer is placed
on the intersection point, it changes shape. The coordinate system
can be shifted after clicking at the required position.
The angle can also be changed by clicking one of the arrow points
of this icon, holding down the mouse button and moving. The
"Jump" function is active with both actions.
All additional coordinate entries and displays then refer to this new
coordinate system.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-211

Select "Display"
The stylized coordinate system is displayed at the previous origin.
Arrow length
Adjust the arrow length on the display.
Options Template coordinates, Pixel, Global coordinates
State the coordinate system of the arrow length.
Reference point X/Y
Manual entry of the new origin.
Angle
Manual entry of the new angle.
Select "Set standard"
Takes the set values as a standard setting.

9.5

> Grid active

The defined grid can be switched on or off. The active grid is


marked with a checkmark.
Grid, orthogonal mode and jump can be active at the same time.

9.6

> Orthogonal mode

The orthogonal mode can be switched on or off. The active


orthogonal mode is marked with a checkmark.
With the active orthogonal mode the drawing activities are
displayed with the mouse on the X or Y-axis, so that only horizontal
and vertical movements are possible.

4-212

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

9.7

> Jump mode

The jump mode can be switched on or off. An active jump mode is


marked with a checkmark.
If the jump mode is active, it is attempted during all drawing
activities with the mouse to jump to the next point of an object of
the drawing within the jump radius.
Note
Grid, orthogonal mode and jump can be active at the same time.
The following sequence applies in this case:

Jump is before grid

Orthogonal mode is before jump and grid, but

The start point is jumped or gridded, depending on the setting

Note
If the jump mode is deactivated, this can be activated temporarily
by pressing the <Ctrl> key.

9.8

> Jump to points of intersection

Here the option is activated or deactivated whether jumping also


applies to intersection points when jump mode is activated. The
active interaction point jump option is marked with a checkmark.
During all drawing activities with the mouse it is attempted to jump
to intersection points of drawing objects within the jump radius.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-213

9.9

> Options

In this submenu various basic settings can be performed for


following areas of the CAD editor:

DXF-Export: Settings for DXF export

Background colors: Setting of the background colors

Formats: Output formats for coordinates and angles

Status line: Format of the status line

Jump: Setting of the jump radii

Bitmaps: Adjustment of the color depth of the bitmaps

Mark: Appearance of the selected, active objects

Draw: Basic settings of the system during drawing

Point: Display of the point basic element

Paths: Paths for various files required in CAD

Save: Automatic saving and creation of backup copies

Templates: Definition of the drawing templates with new drawings

Menu: Shortcuts for menu entries

Objects: Jump points and hotspots for the various object types

Objects: Activate the conversion from area to hatching

The settings performed in these dialog windows for the respective


areas are also saved for new projects with "Save".

4-214

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card DXF export


In this dialog window it can be set in which DXF/DWG format the
export should be performed. The available versions can be
selected from the list.
Options Settings

"Settings, DXF export" dialog window

Fig. 4-163

Card Background colors colors


The background colors of the drawing area can be selected from
this window.
Options Settings

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

"Settings, Background colors" dialog window

Fig. 4-164

Tools menu

4-215

Card Paper
The background color of the drawing area.
Card Margin
The background color of the non-printable margin of the drawing
area (depending on the printer type).
Card Free area
The background color of the free area around the page.
With the "Define" function it is possible to determine a user-defined
free color, "Invisible" does not affect the background colors.
Card Formats
In this dialog window the output formats for coordinates and angles
as well as the decimal separator (point or comma) can be defined.
Options Settings

"Settings, Formats" dialog window

Fig. 4-165

The following settings are possible:

4-216

Comma correction coordinates: The number of digits after the


decimal point.

Comma correction angle: The number of digits after the decimal point.

Angle: Values in decimal degrees, degrees, angles and seconds, arc measure or new degrees.

Decimal separator as comma or point.

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Status line


In this dialog window settings can be made for display of the status
line.
Options Settings

"Settings, Status line" dialog window

Fig. 4-166

Group field Field sizes


Setting of the individual area sizes of the status line. The values for
the individual fields are percentages and state the ratio of the
individual field sizes in relation to one another. The sum of all fields
appearing here must be 100%. If this value is not reached, a
warning message appears.
Zoom slider overview (in percent)
Setting of the zoom area. If this value is 100%, the representation
of the page size on the screen corresponds to the actual drawing
size (zoom slider on the left-hand stop). If values of below 100%
are entered, the drawing is shown enlarged by the respective
factor, at values of above 100% it is shown accordingly smaller.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-217

Card Jump
The jump radii can be set in this dialog window.
Options Settings

"Settings, Jump" dialog window

Fig. 4-167

For the globally set jump and short-term jump by pressing the
<Ctrl> key various jump radii can be defined. It can also be defined
here from which distance objects can be selected.
The values are given in pixel, the jump radius is therefore
independent of the zoom section.
The following settings apply when jumping is switched on. If no
function has been switched on, the activated jump function does
not work. Here it is possible for several functions to be active at the
same time.
Select "Next point"
Jumping is performed to the next point, the jump points of the
individual objects can be set under "Options" > "Objects" (also
refer to the "Objects" section). This function corresponds to
classical jumping.
Select "Jump point on touched object"
The jump point is the jump point set under "Options" > "Objects" of
the just touched object. This function serves for easier selection in
the case of closely arranged objects.

4-218

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Select "Next point on touched object"


The next point on the touched object nearest to the mouse pointer
is jumped. The jump point is therefore exactly on the object,
positioning is determined by the mouse pointer position.
Select "Foot point on touched object"
This function corresponds to the construction of a perpendicular
point. It is therefore only useful on the second point of a line which
is jumped on the perpendicular foot point of the start point of the
line.
Select "Tangential point on touched object"
This function corresponds to the construction of a tangential point.
It is therefore only effective with the second point of an object (line,
circle or arc of a circle) which is jumped to the touched point of the
object start point with a circle or circle arc.
Card Bitmaps
The color depth of bitmaps can be set in this dialog window.
Options Settings

"Settings, Bitmaps" dialog window

Do not modify

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Fig. 4-168

When black and white bitmaps are imported, the color depth
should remain unchanged.

Tools menu

4-219

Card Mark
This dialog window is used to set how activated objects can be
shown by selecting.
Options Settings

"Settings, Mark" dialog window

Fig. 4-169

Select "Invert marked object"


Marked objects are displayed in the inverted color.
Select "Display surrounding rectangle"
A dotted frame is shown around the activated objects. Activation of
this option is not valid until the CAD has been started.
Color selection
If "Invert marked objects" is deactivated, activated objects are
displayed in the color shown here.
New colors can be defined with "Define".

4-220

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Draw
In this dialog window various basic settings can be made which
affect the behavior of the program during drawing.
Options Settings

"Settings, Draw" dialog window

Fig. 4-170

Group field Right mouse button


The function of the right mouse button during drawing and
construction can be switched over as described below.
Option Context menu for length, angle
If a length or an angle is required during construction, the property
of this object is assumed by moving the mouse pointer on an
object of the drawing and clicking it with the right mouse button.
When this function has been activated, a context menu appears on
the corresponding object in which the required property can be
selected.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Context menu length/angle

Fig. 4-171

Tools menu

4-221

Option Click and input


If the right mouse button is pressed during drawing, it acts as if the
left mouse button and the <Enter> key were pressed one after
another.
Option Only input
If the right mouse button is pressed during drawing, it acts as if the
<Enter> key were pressed.
Select "Repeat last drawing operation"
Immediately after conclusion of a drawing operation (e.g. lines of
point, length, angle) the system repeats the same operation (the
start point of the next line can be stated). This function is only
effective if several identical operations have to be performed. This
function is cancelled with the <Esc> key.
Select "Zoom section with a click"
If this option is activated, the zoom section to be selected is
defined by holding down, dragging and releasing the left-hand
mouse button. Otherwise first click and then drag; a second click
cancels the action (also see Section 5.5 "> Free section").
Select "Repeat zoom section action"
If this option is activated, the zoom section selected from the
"Menu" > "View" > "Free section" can be executed continuously in
succession without further menu selection (also refer to the section
5.5 "> Free section").
This can be used to penetrate to very small details in several steps
without having to make another menu selection each time.
This procedure can be terminated by:

4-222

Pressing the <Enter> key

Pressing the <Esc> button of the draw tool bar

Selection of any menu item

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Point
The display of the point drawing element can be set in this dialog
window.
Note
Precondition for this function is the activation of the option "Display
points" in the menu "Tools" > "Options" > "Objects" > "Points".
Options Settings

"Settings, Point" dialog window

Fig. 4-172

Group field Represent


Symbol
Options Point (.), Cross (+), Cross (x), Line (I), No symbol
The representation form of the point is set here. If "Line" is selected, the point is symbolized by a short vertical line. The top end
point depicts the end of the point.
Addition
Options Square, Circle
A square or a circle is drawn around the point symbol.
Group field Size
Symbol size
Here the size of the symbol selected under "Represent" > "Symbol"
is set.
Options Pixel, Template coordinates, Global coordinates
Here the unit of the symbol size input is defined.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-223

Card Paths
Paths for file folders can be determined in this dialog window,
which are required for work with the CAD editor.
Options Settings

"Settings, Paths" dialog window

Fig. 4-173

Card Save
In this dialog window the time can be specified after which the
automatic save function is activated. Apart from that it can be
determined whether a backup copy should be created.
Options Settings

"Settings, Save" dialog window

4-224

Tools menu

Fig. 4-174

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Templates
Options Settings

"Settings, Templates" dialog window

Fig. 4-175

Select "Use always this template"


Here you can define that the respective template is always used for
a new drawing without a prompt.
Card Menu
In this dialog window shortcuts can be defined for all entries in the
drawing program window in order to achieve fast access to the
respective functions.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-225

The defined shortcuts are displayed in the menus after the


respective menu texts.
Options Settings

"Settings, Menu" dialog window

Fig. 4-176

Representation window
Shows the menu structure and permits the selection of the menu
entry for which a shortcut is to be defined.
Key
Selection of the key with which the marked menu entry of the
representation window is to be opened.
Select "<Alt>-, <Shift>-, <Ctrl> key"
Stipulates whether the selected key should execute the shortcut in
connection with the <Alt>, <Shift> or <Ctrl> key.
Button Assign abbreviation
The selected key combination is assigned to the marked menu
entry in the representation window.
If the key combination is to be saved permanently after the current
session, click the "Save" button.
Button Remove abbreviation
The displayed key combination for the marked menu entry of the
representation window is deleted.
If the key combination is to be deleted permanently after the
current session, click the "Save" button.

4-226

Tools menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Card Objects
In this dialog window the jump points and hotspots for the various
object types can be set.
With several objects it is also possible to perform specific settings.
Options Settings

"Settings, Objects, Circle" dialog window

Fig. 4-177

Jump points determine the area of an object onto which other


drawing objects can be jumped if they are near the jump points.
Hotspots are active when an existing object of the drawing is
marked. If the mouse pointer is moved on such a hotspot, it is
possible to change the respective property of the object for which
the hotspot stands by holding down and dragging (e.g. angle, size).

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Tools menu

4-227

Cards Objects Point


In addition to the jump point it can be adjusted whether points are
represented or not. The representation form of the point can be set
(also refer to Section 9.10 "Options" > "Point").
Options Settings

"Settings, Objects, Point" dialog window

Fig. 4-178

Cards Objects Polyline


In addition to the jump point the precision can be set with which
polylines are split into lines or lines and arcs. During the marking
process the polyline is converted to a vector line. The precision
value defines the maximum inaccuracy to the original polyline.
Options Settings

"Settings, Objects, Polyline" dialog window

4-228

Tools menu

Fig. 4-179

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Cards Objects Ellipse arc / Ellipse


In addition to the jump point the precision can be set with which
ellipses and ellipse arcs are split into lines or lines and arcs. During
the marking process the polyline is converted to a vector line. The
precision value defines the maximum inaccuracy to the original
ellipse or to the original ellipse arc.
Options Settings

"Settings, Objects, Ellipse" dialog window

Fig. 4-180

Cards Objects Hatching


A hatching can also be displayed as an area by clicking the "Slow
hatch as area" checkbox in the group field "Miscellaneous",
confirming with "OK" and restarting the CAD.

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

"Settings, Objects, Hatching" dialog window

Fig. 4-181

Tools menu

4-229

10.

Window menu

Here all the open windows of the CAD can be arranged in different
ways. The selectable options comply with the conventions with
regard to the arrangement of file windows:

Window menu

11.

Fig. 4-182

Menu ? (Help)

Help menu

Fig. 4-183

11.1 > Index


This menu entry accesses the index of the CAD help system and
opens the respective help file.

11.2 > Copyright


Opens a menu window with information on the CAD version.

4-230

Window menu

SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010

Chapter 5

Examples, exercises

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

1.

Introduction.................................................................... 5-3

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

Example Compass...................................................... 5-4


Creating a graphic ........................................................... 5-5
Administrate and allocate laser parameters .................. 5-26
Optimize marking program ............................................ 5-31
Optimize graphic............................................................ 5-32
Optimize marking sequence .......................................... 5-32
Optimize laser parameters............................................. 5-34

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Rating plate example................................................... 5-38


Inserting the TRUMPF logo and lettering ...................... 5-44
Define and position variables ........................................ 5-48
Sorting interactively ....................................................... 5-53
Set laser parameters ..................................................... 5-55

4.
4.1

Target example ............................................................ 5-63


Define hatching style ..................................................... 5-67

5.
5.1

CE mark example......................................................... 5-70


"Trim (cut)" tool .............................................................. 5-74

Introduction

5-1

5-2

6.
6.1
6.2

Example bitmap ........................................................... 5-77


Importing bitmap ............................................................ 5-78
Setting laser parameter ................................................. 5-81

7.
7.1
7.2

Import external file formats ........................................ 5-82


Import PCR files............................................................. 5-82
Import CAD files............................................................. 5-83

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3

Determining laser parameters.................................... 5-84


Determining laser parameters for plastic....................... 5-84
Determining laser parameters for annealing metals...... 5-86
Determining laser parameters for engraving metals ..... 5-88

Introduction

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

1.

Introduction

This chapter contains examples of how to:

Draw graphic elements

Work with variables

Administrate and allocate laser parameters

Optimize marking programs

Import file formats such as,


HPGL

IGES

DXF

DWG

PCR

BMP

JPG

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Introduction

5-3

2.
Assignment

Example Compass

Create a marking program which generates the following graphic:

Example graphic for creating


a marking program

5-4

Example Compass

Fig. 5-1

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

2.1

Creating a graphic

This section describes how you can genarate the graphic "wind
rose" (Fig. 5-1).

Procedure

Create new marking program.

Set grid.

Draw circles.

Draw rectangle.

Draw octagon.

Enter text.

Move text.

Rotate text.

Enter circular text.

Read in logo from a file.

You can enter geometric figures in two ways:

From the tool bar.

With the "Draw" menu.

The following instructions only describe the method using the tool
bar for each figure.
The sequence in which the figures and text are entered determines
the sequence with which the laser transfers the elements of the
graphic to the workpiece. The sequence can be subsequently
changed in order to optimize the marking program.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-5

Create marking program

If the drawing field already contains graphic elements:

Activate the "New" function in the "File" menu.


A new drawing field appears.

Set grid

1. Select the "Grid" function in the "Tools" menu.


The "grid and local coordinate system" dialog window opens
up.

"Grid and local coordinate system" dialog window

Fig. 5-2

2. Enter the required values.


3. Click "OK".
The dialog window is closed. Grid points are displayed in the
drawing field at the defined spacing.

5-6

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Draw circles

1. Click the (1) "Draw circle" and also activate the (2) "Center
point, radius" button.
The mouse pointer appears as a pencil with a circle.

2
"Draw" tool bar

Fig. 5-3

2. Move the pencil with the mouse to the place where the center
lines intercept and click once with the left mouse button.
The inside circle should have a diameter of 30 mm.
3. Move the mouse around 15 mm to the right and click with the
left button.
4. Draw two additional circles by repeating steps 2 and 3 but
place the circles on another position on the drawing field
Note
If the item "Repeat last drawing operation" in the Extras -> Options
-> Draw menu is activated, you can draw more circles by clicking
the right mouse button. You can end this function by pressing the
Escape <Esc> key or by selecting another tool.
The coordinates of the mouse pointer is displayed in 2 ways:

Digitally in the center of the button bar

As an analog display in the form of red lines on the rulers


at the edge of the drawing field.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-7

5. Select one of the circles by clicking the edge.


6. Using the right mouse button, open the context menu and click
on the "Properties" entry.
A dialog opens.

"Modify circle properties" dialog window

Fig. 5-4

7. Enter 15 mm for the first circle radius.


8. Click "OK".
9. Center the circle by clicking the "vertical page center" and
"horizontal page center" buttons one after the other.
Note
These buttons only appear when you have marked an element.
Each additional circle should be 5 mm larger.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 and enter 20 or 25 mm into the dialog.
Your drawing should then look like the image below.

5-8

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Drawing field with three circles

Correct errors

Fig. 5-5

If you want to delete the graphic element again, proceed as


follows:
1. Click anywhere on the graphic element to be deleted.
The graphic element is depicted with a dotted square.

Entf

2. Press <Del>.
The marked graphic element is deleted.

Save marking program

You should save the results of your work after each partial step.
3. Click on the "Save" icon next to it.
The "Save as" dialog box appears.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Save as" dialog window

Fig. 5-6

Example Compass

5-9

4. Select the folder for your marking programs. Enter the


"EXERCISE" file name.
5

Click the "Save" button.


The name entered [EXERCISE] is in the title bar of CAD.

The marking program is saved as the file "EXERCISE.VLF".


As you continue, you can save your work simply by clicking the
"Save" icon. If you do not wish to overwrite the existing file, select
the menu item "Save as" in the "File" menu and enter a new path
and file name in the dialog box.
Draw rectangle

1. Click the "Rectangle" button and also activate the "Rectangle:


two diagonal points" button.
The mouse pointer appears as a pencil.

"Draw" tool bar

Fig. 5-7

2. Place the pencil at the top left next to the circles and click once
with the left button. Drag the mouse over the circles to the
bottom right and conclude the action with a left click.
The corners of the square are fixed in position.
Esc

3. Cancel the "Rectangle" action by pressing <Esc>.

4. Center the square by marking it and clicking the "vertical page


center" and "horizontal page center" buttons.
There should be a distance of 1 mm from the outer circle to the
square. The circle diameter is 50 mm. The square must therefore have a side length of 52 mm.

5-10

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

5. Mark the square by clicking it at any point. Open the context


menu with the right mouse button and click the "Properties"
entry.
6. Enter 52 mm for "Width" and "Height" and click the "OK" button.
The corners of the square must be grooved.
7. To this purpose click the "Tools" button.
The various tools are shown on the buttons.

Tool bar

Fig. 5-8

8. Click the "Concave Fillet" button.


To the right additional fields are then displayed.
9. Enter 4 mm for the radius.
10. Move to a corner of the square with the mouse pointer.
The mouse pointer changes to a pair of scissors.
11. Then click with the left mouse button.
The grooving is cut out.
12. Repeat the described steps with the other corners.
The square which surrounds the three circles is drawn.

Esc

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

To cancel the tool mode press the <Esc> key.

Example Compass

5-11

Your graphic should then look like the image below.

Current processing status

Draw octagon

Fig. 5-9

1. Draw an auxiliary square that surrounds the current graphic


and center it horizontally and vertically.
2. Mark the square and open the context menu.
3. Click the "Properties" entry and enter 68 mm for "Width" and
"Height".
4. Center the square once more.
5. Click the "Reproduce" button.
The "Reproduce (matrix)" dialog appears.

5-12

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

7. Change this as shown.

"Reproduce (matrix)" dialog window

Fig. 5-10

To the right of the graphic a new, identical square has been


created.
6. Mark this and open "Properties".
7. Enter 45 for "Angle of rotation" and then click "OK".
The square has then been rotated.
8. Center the square in by marking it and by clicking the "vertical
page center" and "horizontal page center" buttons.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-13

Auxiliary squares

Fig. 5-11

9. Click the "Section" button.


A cross appears.
10. Click on a point and pull the frame around the square.
When the mouse button is released, the graphic is enlarged.

"Polyline" button

Fig. 5-12

11. Click the "Polyline" button.


The mouse pointer appears as a pencil. New fields appear.

Fig. 5-13

12. Open the dialog below with the downward pointing arrow.

5-14

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Construct Polyline" dialog window

Fig. 5-14

13. Mark the box "Closed" and close this dialog box.
In this manner the polygon is closed when completed.
14. Activate the jump function with the "Jump" button.
The octagon is then much easier to draw.
15. Move to coordinates X 74, Y 94 with the pencil.
The pencil turns into a dart. This means that your positioning is
on target.
16. As soon as the dart appears click with the mouse. (Start at the
arrow as shown under Fig. 5-11
17. Move clockwise to points 2 to 8 and mark these by clicking the
mouse.
18. Conclude the last (9th) point by clicking with the right mouse
button.
The octagon has then been drawn.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-15

To exit the polygon mode, click the right checkmark.

Exit polygon mode

Delete auxiliary squares

Fig. 5-15

Now the auxiliary squares must be deleted.


Click both squares one after the other while holding the <Ctrl>
key and delete these with the <Del> key.
The graphic then looks like the image below.

Current processing status

5-16

Example Compass

Fig. 5-16

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Next, the missing texts are created.


Enter text 1. Click the "Text or barcode" button.
The "Data object" dialog appears.

"Data object" dialog window

Fig. 5-17

2. Select "As text" and click on "Text properties".


The "Properties of the text object" dialog appears.

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

Fig. 5-18

3. Fill out the fields as shown in Fig. 5-18 and click the "OK"
button.
Return to the dialog box "Data object".

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-17

4. To this purpose click "Position".


The mouse pointer appears as a pencil with the letters "North".
5. Move the mouse to the empty top field, center the text visually
and then click once with the left mouse button.
The text is then provisionally positioned.
However, you wish to position the text exactly.
6. The text is still marked. Click the "Center horizontally" button.
The distance from the lettering to the square should be 2 mm.
7. This is achieved by setting position X to 48 mm in the context
menu "Properties", "Change properties", "Position" (2 mm
higher than the rectangle).
Rotate text

Create the texts: "East", "South", "West". This is most quickly


performed as follows:
1. Mark the text "North" and then click "Reproduce".
2. The "Reproduce (circularly)" dialog opens.

"Reproduce (circularly)" dialog window

3.

5-18

Fig. 5-19

Take the settings from the dialog above and click "OK".

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

The graphic appears as follows:

Current processing status

Fig. 5-20

4. Place the three texts in the correct fields by selecting and


dragging them.
5. Click the right mouse button on "North" and on "Properties" in
the context menu. Click "Modify properties" in the following
dialog. In the next dialog overwrite "North" with "South" and
then click "OK".
6. Close the "Variable" dialog.
The text is still marked.
7. Center it vertically with the respective button. Overwrite in the
same way and position the two remaining texts.
Circular text
1. Click the "Text or barcode" button once more. Select "Text properties" in the "Data object" dialog.
2. Enter the text in the entry field and take the settings from the
following dialog.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-19

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

Fig. 5-21

3. Click on the "Position" tab.

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

5-20

Example Compass

Fig. 5-22

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

4. Enter the settings from Fig. 5-22. (Position X, Y must not be


entered).
5. Click button "OK".
The dialog box "Data object" appears.

Placing text

Fig. 5-23

6. Click "Position".
The mouse pointer changes to a pencil with attached lettering.
7. Move the pencil to the place where the text should be placed.
As soon as you click with the left-hand mouse the text is fixed
in place.
8. Now enter the remaining text, "CAD" as described in Fig. 5-1.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-21

Position and properties of the text object

Fig. 5-24

9. Take the displayed values and settings shown on the "Position" tab.
Note
To ensure that the text is curved downwards, a negative preceding
sign must be entered before "Radius".
10. Position the text as described above.
Your graphic should then look like the image below.

Current editing status

5-22

Example Compass

Fig. 5-25

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Read in logo from a file

Paste the TRUMPF logo into the graphics and place it in the center
of the circle. The logo comes from a DXF file.
1. Click the item "Import DXF/DWG file" in the "Edit" menu.

"Edit" menu

Fig. 5-26

The "Open" dialog appears.

"Open" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

Fig. 5-27

5-23

2. Select the file "Trumpf_Logo.dxf" in


"C:\TRUMARK\VLF\Import".
The "Import scale allocation" dialog appears.

"Import scale allocation" dialog window

the

directory

Fig. 5-28

In the dialog window "Assign import standard", set the import


parameters for the DXF file. The function "Optimal standard
suggests which standard you can use to import the logo. This
corresponds to the field size and would be too large in this
particular case.
Note
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "Edit menu" > "Import file" for more
information on importing files.

5-24

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

3. Click on the "Vertical sheet center" and "Horizontal sheet


center" buttons and then on "OK".
The logo appears in the center of the graphic.
The graphic is fully created. Your drawing field should then look
like the image below.

Drawing field with completed graphic

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

Fig. 5-29

5-25

2.2
Procedure

Cancel grouping

Administrate and allocate laser


parameters

Cancel grouping

Enter laser parameters for the circles.

Enter the laser parameters for additional graphic elements.

Change the allocation of the laser parameters.

First find out if the graphic elements are grouped. In this case proceed as follows.
If the graphic elements can be individually marked, you can proceed with the "Enter laser parameters for the circles".
1. Click on each individual graphic element.
If several graphic elements are clicked with one click, these are
grouped. Cancel the grouping as follows:
2. Mark the grouped graphic elements. Open the context menu
with the right mouse button and click "Dissolve".

Context menu Dissolve

Fig. 5-30

3. Continue with all graphic elements which are still grouped.


When the graphic elements have been dissolved, they can be
marked individually.

5-26

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Administrate laser
parameters

1. Click the "Administrate laser parameter" button.


The "Administrate laser parameter" dialog opens.

"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window

Fig. 5-31

2. Click in the line "In this project" and then click 6 times on
"Insert new parameter".
You have now opened six new parameters which you will need
for the "wind rose" project.

Section laser parameters

Fig. 5-32

3. Overwrite these with "Circles", "Squares", "Rectangle", "North


etc.", "Cross-section" and "Logo" and confirm the entry with
<Enter>.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-27

To this purpose simply click in the blue area.


The cursor flashes. You can then overwrite.
5. Now click the "Circles" parameter and then on the "Main parameter" tab.
6. Enter the value for "Circles" in accordance with Tab. 5-1.

"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window

Fig. 5-33

7. Enter the other values in the same manner and then click
"OK".
The dialog box is closed and you return to the drawing field.
Graphic
element(s)

Track width
mm

Power
[%]

Velocity
[mm/s]

Pulse freq.
[Hz]

Circles

0.050

70

600

22000

Squares

0.050

70

500

25000

Rectangle

0.050

70

1000

30000

North etc.

0.050

80

1000

35000

Crosssection

0.050

70

700

28000

Logo

0.050

90

600

40000
Tab. 5-1

5-28

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Allocate laser parameters

The laser parameters must then be allocated to the individual


graphic elements.
1. First mark the three circles. To this purpose hold down the
<Ctrl> key and then click the three circles one after the other.
2. Open the context menu and select "Group".
The three circles then form a group. The next time they are
clicked all three are marked.
3. Open the "Modify object properties" dialog box and then click
on the "Laser" tab.

"Modify block properties" dialog window

Fig. 5-34

Note
The graphic elements which you have marked can be checked on
the left. In the center you can see the parameters which you
created previously.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-29

4. Select the laser parameter "circles" and click on "OK".


5. Click a free place in the drawing field.
The circles are displayed in the color which you selected for
them.
The laser parameters for the circles have been entered.
Proceed as described above for the other graphic elements. Group
the elements with the same laser parameters together.
Note
The values in Tab. 5-1 have been selected at random as a sample
exercise. To get optimal results, trials are done to determine the
parameters
Click the "Save marking program" button.
The marking program has then been created.

5-30

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

2.3

Optimize marking program

The optimization of a marking program is usually only necessary


when you are processing a material for the first time. You will
generally be able to achieve the best possible results by a few
marking trials and subsequent optimization steps.
Note
TRUMPF recommends saving various optimization steps as separate files and logging the results carefully. You will then create a
database which can be useful for subsequent marking jobs.
Optimization criteria

Methods

You can optimize a marking program with regard to:

The marking quality

Duration of the program sequence

You have two methods:

Optimize the graphic

Optimize the marking sequence

Optimize laser parameters

Change offset values

Optimize the optics system

The methods are described in the following sections.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-31

2.4

Optimize graphic

The graphics in CAD are vector graphics. Especially in the case of


imported graphics, it can be useful to optimize the graphics by
deleting individual vectors lying near each other or by replacing
graphics with small vectors with polylines.
Amongst other things, you can carry out the following functions
using CAD:

Change the graphic

Change the size, position and orientation of graphic elements

Delete graphic elements

Add graphic elements

Change the font

1. Start the CAD.


2. Load the marking program which is to be optimized.
The graphic of the marking program appears in the drawing
field.
3. Change the graphic as required. Refer to Section 2.1 and to
Chapter 3 of this manual for further information on the
procedures.
4. Save the changed marking program. Select a new file name if
you want to retain the original condition.
5. Close the CAD program.
The changed marking program can then be executed.

2.5

Optimize marking sequence

In order to shorten the running time of a marking program it can be


preferable to change the sequence in which the graphic elements
are transferred to the workpiece.
If you do not change the sequence, the graphic elements are
executed in the sequence in which they were drawn.

5-32

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Sort objects

The graphic elements of the marking program are sorted so that


the program running time is as short as possible.
Note
You can change the graphic elements manually if you want a
different sequence than that generated by the automatic program.

Methods

The following dialog shows the criteria according to which you


can perform sorting.

"Sort objects" dialog window

Fig. 5-35

You can either:

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Sort all objects


or

Only sort marked objects

Example Compass

5-33

You can then sort according to:

Laser power

Focusing

Z offset

All criteria can be given priorities.

When you select "Manual sort" you can change the sorting sequence according to your own wishes.
1. Click the individual elements in the required sequence.
2. Save the changed marking program. Select a new file name if
you want to retain the original condition.
3. Close the CAD program.
The changed marking program can then be executed.
Note
More information on changing the marking sequence can be found
in Chapter 4, Section 7.5 "Laser menu" > "Sort".

2.6

Optimize laser parameters

The laser parameters have a decisive influence on:

The marking quality

Duration of the program sequence

You can change the laser parameters using the CAD. Proceed as
described in Section 2.2.
The following items are possibilities for optimizing the laser
parameters.
Lines too weak

If the lines are too weak:

5-34

Increase the power for the respective graphic elements

or lower the speed

or increase the pulse frequency

Example Compass

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Lines too thick

If the lines are too thick:

Program running time too


long

lower the power for the respective graphic elements

or increase the speed

or lower the pulse frequency

If the marking program is too slow:

Increase the speed

Note
Please note that a higher speed normally means weaker lines. This
can be compensated by increasing the power.

Notes on selecting the pulse frequency


The pulse frequency should always be selected so that the individual pulses on the workpiece generate points which overlap.
The pulse frequency is therefore related to the following parameters:

Focus diameter

Speed of scanning

The following figure shows the correlation between the pulse


frequency and the position of the points which are generated by
the two consecutive pulses on the workpieces.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example Compass

5-35

1
2

Pulse frequency too high


Pulse frequency correct

Pulse frequency too low

Influence of the pulse frequency

Fig. 5-36

Furthermore on lasers with a Q-switch the pulse power and the


pulse energy depend on the pulse frequency. The following diagram shows the principal link.

P
Q

10

15

20
fp [kHz]

Pulse power P, pulse energy Q depending on the pulse frequency

5-36

Example Compass

Fig. 5-37

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Determining the pulse


frequency

The following example shows how the pulse frequency fp can be


determined.
Assuming the following values:

Example

Parameter

Symbol

Value

Diameter of the point which a laser pulse


produces on the workpiece

40 m

Overlapping

25 m

This results in the step

15 m

300 mm/s

Scanning speed
Example parameters for calculating the pulse frequency

Tab. 5-2

x
s

Example parameters for calculating the pulse frequency

Fig. 5-38

This results in the time t from pulse to pulse:

t =

s
v

15m
300 mm / s

= 50 s

This results in the pulse frequency fp:

fp

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

1
t

1
50 s

Example Compass

= 20 000 Hz

5-37

3.

Rating plate example

In this example you will practice the following steps:

Drawing a rating plate

Filling the rating plate with text

Inserting variable text

Importing a DXF file

Define laser parameters

Allocate laser parameters


1

TruMark Serie

1 Logo (DXF file)

5 Serial number

2 Character set 1451BF4, 3 mm

6 Interactive field

3 Character set Standard, 2 mm

7 Current date

4 Character set Standard, 3 mm


Layout rating plate

5-38

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-39

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

100

86

73

52

20

The rating plate has the following dimensions:

35
25
17
8

60

32

23

Dimensions nameplate

Draw outer contour

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

R1,5

Fig. 5-40

Select the "New" menu item in the "File" menu,


or

Click the button with the same function


A new drawing project is created.

In the "Draw" menu select the item "Rectangle" and then the
entry "Point, Width, Height, Angle",
or

Click on the button "Rectangle" and then on

"Point, Width, Height".

Click this button.


The following dialog field appears.

Rating plate example

5-39

"Rectangle: point, width, height" dialog window

Fig. 5-41

Enter the required values into the dialog field. As a starting


point select the position X0 / Y0.
The rating plate has a width of 100 mm and a height of 35 mm.
You get the following contour:

Current processing status

Corner fillet

5-40

Fig. 5-42

In the "Draw" menu select the item "Tools" and then the item
"Corner Fillet",
or

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

First click the "Tools" button then the "Fillet" button.

Enter the required value in this case 1.5 mm in the dialog


box.

"Corner fillet" dialog window

Fig. 5-43

Note
If this dialog does not appear, click the black down arrow. You can
also enter the radius without opening the dialog.

Move the mouse pointer on to the corners that you want to


round off. The mouse pointer changes to a pair of scissors.
Then click with the left mouse button.
A radius of 1.5 mm is then created.

Repeat this procedure on the outer contours of the nameplate.


The contour is then as shown below:

Current processing status

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-44

5-41

Draw inside lines

In the "Draw" menu select the item "Line" and then the item
"Two points",
or

Click the button with the same function.

With the next 10 steps enter the start and end points. Conclude each step by clicking the red cross.

10

Start and end points of the lines

Fig. 5-45

Note
Do not move the mouse pointer into the drawing area, otherwise
the previously entered values will be overwritten and you will have
to start from the beginning.

5-42

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

The rating plate then looks like the diagram below:

Current processing status

Fig. 5-46

Save the project.


In the "File" menu select the "Save as" item and save the file under
the name Type logo.vlf.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Save as" dialog window

Fig. 5-47

Rating plate example

5-43

Center

Pull a frame around the rating plate.


All elements have then been picked and can be moved together.

Now click these buttons one after another.


The rating plate is centered horizontally and vertically.

3.1

Inserting the TRUMPF logo and


lettering

Insert the TRUMPF logo and the text into the nameplate.

Click the item "Import DXF/DWG file" in the "Edit" menu.


The "Open" dialog appears. Select the file "Trumpf_Logo.dxf"
in the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\Import"

"Open" dialog window

5-44

Fig. 5-48

Click "Open".
The "Import scale allocation" dialog appears.

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Import scale allocation" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-49

Overwrite the scale with: "0.25:1". (The logo is imported with


of the original size).

For "Vertical position" enter "Left", for "Horizontal position",


"Top" and confirm the entries with "OK".
The logo then appears in the top left-hand corner of the
drawing field.

Pick it and pull it to the required position.

Rating plate example

5-45

The text then follows: "TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG"

Click the "Text" button.


The dialog window "Data object" appears.

"Data object" dialog window

Mark the options box "As text" in the group box "Appearance"
and then click on the button "Text properties".

"Properties of the text object" dialog window

5-46

Fig. 5-50

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-51

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

In the white field enter the text. For "Text size" enter the font
size in mm and under "Fonts" enter the respective name or
select the required name from the pull-down menu.

Confirm the entries with "OK".

You will then return to the "Data object" dialog. The position
option is then activated.

Click the "Activate" button.

Your text then appears on the drawing area as a shadow.

Now move the mouse to the position where the text is to be


entered. As soon as the text is accurately positioned click with
the left-hand mouse button.

For the lettering on the next line use the "Standard" font. Proceed
as described previously.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

5-47

3.2
Serial number

Define and position variables

Open the "Data object"


"Administrate variable list".

dialog

and

click

"Administrate variable list" dialog window

the

button

Fig. 5-52

Click the "New variable" button.

The dialog window "Define new variable" appears.

Enter "Number" in the text box "Variable name".

"Define new variable" dialog window

5-48

Fig. 5-53

Click "OK".

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

For the variable "Number", select the input "Serial number"


from the drop-down list box "Data origin:".

Dialog window variable list "Number"

Interactive variable

Enter the values in the group box "Properties of Number" as


shown in Fig. 5-54.

Create a variable with the name "ID Number".

Select "Interactively" from the drop-down list box "Data origin".

Dialog window list list "ID Number"

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-54

Fig. 5-55

Enter the ID number in text field prompt text.

Rating plate example

5-49

Variable current date

Define the variable "Current date".

Select "Code word" from the drop-down list box "Data origin".

Click on the arrow next to "Code word:" to reveal more options.

A selection of date and time formats is opened.

Administrate variables (section)

5-50

Fig. 5-56

Mark the required format for the date.


The line is accepted.

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Click the "Paste" button.


The format for the date is transferred to the text box "Complete
text:"

Note
If further key words are needed, select them and press "Insert".
The new key word is added to the existing key word.

Administrate variables (section)

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-57

Exit the dialog window "Administrate variables (section)" by


clicking on "OK".

Rating plate example

5-51

Positioning variables

Data object

Fig. 5-58

Select the variable "Number" from the drop-down list box


"Reference variable:". If desired, you can select a font, text
size and further attributes using the button "Text properties".

Now click on "Place" and position the variable "Number" as a


normal text.

Repeat the procedure for the variables "Current date" and "ID
Number".

The nameplate layout is shown in Fig. 5-39.

5-52

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

3.3

Sorting interactively

To optimize the marking processing sequence, the lines, radii and


lettering are sorted.
Before you begin sorting, you must select all objects you would like
to sort. Click in the drawing level with the right mouse button and
pull a rectangle over the objects requiring sorting.

Select the "Sort" menu item in the "Laser" menu,


or

Click the button with the same function.


The dialog window "Sort objects" is opened.

"Sort objects" dialog window

Fig. 5-59

Now click the "Manual sort" button. Each individual object is given
a number. This number stands for the processing sequence
(Fig. 5-60).

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

5-53

TruMark Serie

Marking field sorting sequence

Fig. 5-60

Note
The black spot appears here because very many polygon contours
must be sorted. When enlarged (Fig. 5-61), this is what it looks
like:

Detail polygon contours

Sort manually

Fig. 5-61

The automatically suggested sequence can be recompiled by


clicking on the individual objects with the mouse.
For this, press the <Shift> key and move the mouse pointer so that
it touches the required object. Once the mouse pointer is over the
object, the corresponding sorting number jumps to the mouse
pointer. When the <Shift> key is released, the position remains
saved.
By using the right mouse button or by pressing <Enter>, you can
confirm this action. By pressing <Esc> or clicking on any menu
selection, this action is cancelled.

5-54

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

3.4

Set laser parameters

In this section, you will learn how global parameters are applied in
projects.
The rating plate is to be cut from the film without burning the
backing. This is achieved by allocating separate parameters to the
frame. Name this parameter "Cut".
The lettering and the inside lines should be marked without cutting
the film. Name this parameter "Font".

Select the "Laser parameter" menu item from the "Laser"


menu,
or

Click the button with the same function.


The dialog box "Administrate laser parameters" appears on the
screen (refer to Fig. 5-62).

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-62

5-55

Set main parameter

Click the top entry under "(Global parameters)" and then twice
on the "Insert new parameter" button.
Two parameter entries appear with the designation "Parameter
x".

Click on the marking and change it to "Cut" und "Font" (also


refer to Fig. 5-62).

Click the "Main parameter" tab, mark the "Cut" parameter and
accept the values as shown in Fig. 5-63.

Allocate a color to this parameter.

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

5-56

Fig. 5-63

Change now to the parameter "Font" and accept the values as


shown in Fig. 5-64.

Allocate a color to this parameter.

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

Fig. 5-64

You have now defined the parameters "Cut" and "Font" as "Global
parameters". In future they will be available for similar projects.
To be able to use the parameters in "In this project", you have to
create a link.

Click the "Cut" parameter, hold down the left mouse button and
pull the parameter downwards.
A link has then been created.

Repeat this step for the "Font" parameter.

The dialog field "Administrate laser parameter" appears just as


shown in Fig. 5-65.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

5-57

"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window

Fig. 5-65

Note
If you change the global parameters, the changes are accepted by
the links. The linked parameters cannot be changed.
Allocate laser parameter
"Trim"

The laser parameters must then be allocated to the individual elements of the drawing.

Select the contour first (refer to Fig. 5-66).

TruMark Serie

Section "Marking field"

5-58

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-66

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the
"Properties" entry.

Context menu

Fig. 5-67

The dialog window "Modify block properties" (refer to Fig. 568) appears.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Rating plate example

5-59

The selected contour from the drawing appears in the left-hand


window so that it can be checked.

Then click the "Laser" tab.


Here you will find the names of the previously defined laser
parameters.

Select "Cut" and confirm with "OK".


You will then return to the drawing.

Click outside the drawing into the empty area.


The contour is then displayed in the previously defined color.

"Modify rectangle properties" dialog window

5-60

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-68

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Allocate laser parameter


"Font"

The "font" laser parameter should then be allocated to the fonts


and the inside lines. For this, this must be selected. This is best
achieved as follows:

Hold down the <Shift> key and pull a frame around the fonts
and lines inside the contour while holding the left mouse button
down.

All elements are selected which are touched or enclosed by the


selection rectangle.
After releasing the following image appears:

TruMark Serie

Section "Marking field"

Repeat the same steps as for "Cut".

"Modify object properties" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-69

Rating plate example

Fig. 5-70

5-61

Click once outside the drawing.


Lines and fonts are then displayed in the previously defined
color.

Save the "Rating plate" project.


The laser parameters have then been allocated and the
drawing appears as follows:

TruMark Serie

Finished rating plate

Fig. 5-71

The TruTops Mark program can then interpret the data from the
drawing and execute the marking program.
In Chapter 3, Section 2 "Start screen > Loading a marking
program" you can learn how to load the marking program and to
run the program on your marking laser.

5-62

Rating plate example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

4.

Target example

In the "Target" project you will learn the following:

Drawing circles

Reproducing

Modifying properties

Centering

Administrating and changing hatching styles

Filling out (hatching)

When finished the target should be as follows:

Target

Draw circle

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-72

To this purpose select the "Draw" menu, the item "Circle" and
the entry "Center and radius",
or

Click the button with the same function.

Target example

5-63

The following dialog field appears:


Note
If this dialog does not appear, click the black downward arrow.

"Circle: Center, radius" dialog window

Reproduce

5-64

Fig. 5-73

Take the values as they are shown here and confirm your
entries by clicking the red checkmark.

The target comprises 7 circles. For this reason reproduce the circle
you have just drawn.

In the context menu select the item "Modify" >"Copy grid-like",


or

Click the "Reproduce" button.


The dialog window "Reproduce (matrix)" is opened.

Target example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Dialog window "Reproduce (matrix)"

Accept the values as shown here and confirm with "OK".

Select the second circle, open the context menu with the right
mouse button and select "Properties".
In the dialog box that follows, you can see the properties of the
selected circle.

"Modify circle properties" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-74

Fig. 5-75

Change the value for X: to 60 and the radius to 10. Confirm the
entries with "OK".

Target example

5-65

Repeat this for the remaining three circles. Increase the value
for the radius by 5 mm in each case.

Note
You can also multiply the circles by generating equidistants. Select
the menu "Characters" > "Tools" > "Equidistants", set the distance
in the tool bar "Action" to 5 mm, select the circle using the
mouse.An equidistant circular line with a distance of 5 mm appears
The drawing then looks like shown in Fig. 5-76.

Current processing status

5-66

Target example

Fig. 5-76

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

4.1

Define hatching style

Before you can start filling out the areas, define the hatching first.

Select the "Hatch styles" menu item from the "Laser" menu.
The "Administrate hatching" dialog appears. Here new
hatching styles can also be defined.

"Administrate hatching" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Target example

Fig. 5-77

5-67

Defining hatching

Define the following four hatchings:


Intensive

45 degrees

Equidistant

Linie spacing

0.050 mm

2.00 mm

1.00 mm

2.00 mm

Margin distance

0.010 mm

0.00 mm

1.00 mm

0.00 mm

Shading angle

0.00

45.00

Angle increment
Number of hatchings

Cross

0.00 mm
45

4
Tab. 5-3

For the hatching "Equidistant", set the radio button to equidistants.


Fill out areas

First fill out the inside circle (radius 5 mm).

Select the inner circle. Using the right mouse button, open the
context menu and select "Fill".

In the following dialog window, select hatch style "Intensive"


and confirm with "OK".

"Fill" dialog window

5-68

Target example

Fig. 5-78

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Current processing status

Fig. 5-79

To fill the next circle, select the second and third circles.

To this purpose hold down the <Ctrl> key and then click the
second and third circles one after the other.

Repeat these steps for circles 4, 5 and 6, 7.


The target is created as shown in Fig. 5-72.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Target example

5-69

5.

CE mark example

In this example you will create the following CE mark step by step.

Layout CE mark

Fig. 5-80

You will learn the following new commands:

Cutting

Enlarging a section

Jump mode

Orthogonal mode

First draw the circles. The inner circle has a radius of 14 mm, the
outer circle a radius of 21 mm.

Click the "Circle" button and move the mouse pointer into the
drawing area.
The mouse pointer changes to a pencil surrounded by a circle.

Move to X30 / Y60 and click on the right mouse button.


The circle is deposited.
Note
In case the option "Repeat last drawing operation " is activated
in the menu "Extras" > "Options" at the "Draw" tab, a new circle
appears which you can place at the required position by
clicking on the right mouse button. Exit this mode by pressing
<Esc>.

5-70

Draw a new circle next to this circle on the right.

CE mark example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

The drawing then looks like the image below.

Current processing status

Now select the left circle and open the context menu. Select
"Properties" here.
The dialog window "Modify circle properties" appears.

"Modify circle properties" dialog window

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-81

CE mark example

Fig. 5-82

5-71

The current dimensions of the selected circle are:


X = 30, Y = 60, radius = 14.
For the second circle, the following dimensions apply:
X = 30, Y = 60, radius = 21.
The following appears:

Current processing status

Select both circles by dragging a rectangle over them.


The circles are selected.

Click on the button "Multiply".

Take these values as shown in the "Reproduce" dialog.

"Reproduce (matrix)" dialog window

5-72

Fig. 5-83

Fig. 5-84

Confirm the entries with "OK".

CE mark example

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Create two vertical subsidiary lines going through the center of the
circles.

Click on the button "Line".

Open the "Line two points" dialog and enter the start and end
points which are to lead through the center of the circle.

Coordinates for the left circle


Fig. 5-85

Coordinates for the right circle

Fig. 5-86

Current processing status

Fig. 5-87

Delete the lines and circle segments that are not needed.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

CE mark example

5-73

5.1

"Trim (cut)" tool

Click on the button "Tools".


The tool bar is then shown.

Click on the button "Cut off" and move the mouse pointer on to
one line (refer to Fig. 5-88) which you no longer need.

Click on all lines and circle segments that are not needed one
by one until the drawing (refer to Fig. 5-88) is created.

Current processing status

Fig. 5-88

Change the second "C" into an "E". Draw a vertical line first for the
front end of the middle bar "E"

Open the dialog window "Line: two points" and enter the start
and end points.

Click on the red hook to confirm the entry.

"Line two points" dialog window

5-74

CE mark example

Fig. 5-89

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Enlarge the section in the middle of the E character.

Click the "Section" button and move the mouse pointer into the
drawing area.
A cross appears.

Drag a rectangle around the section which you want to enlarge


using the cross-hair pointer.
The section is shown enlarged (refer to Fig. 5-90).

Detail of E

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-90

Click on the button "Orthogonal mode" and "Catch mode".

It is only possible to move in a vertical and horizontal direction in orthogonal mode.

The mouse pointer turns into a dart in jump mode. As soon


as the dart appears the position is absolutely correct.

Click the "Line" button and move with the pencil to the top end
of the vertical line until the pencil turns into a dart. Click with
the left mouse button and move to the left with the mouse.
Move over the line so that an intersection point appears.

In the same way, drag a second horizontal line from the lower
end of the vertical line to the circular arc.

CE mark example

5-75

Current processing status

Fig. 5-91

The unnecessary lines are deleted (refer to Section 5.1 Trimming).

Fill the CE mark

Click the "Whole page" button.


The CE mark is created. Now, fill out the contour of the
CE mark.

Pull a rectangle around the entire drawing.


Both characters are selected.

Center the drawing in the drawing field.

Select the "Fill" item in the context menu. Proceed as described in Section 3.
The CE mark is then complete.

Current processing status

5-76

CE mark example

Fig. 5-92

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

6.

Example bitmap

In this example, you will learn to import a bitmap to find the


appropriate laser parameters for the marking.

Bitmap

Fig. 5-93

You will get to know the following functions:


Preparing bitmap files

Importing bitmap

Configuration of the laser parameters for bitmap

Firstly consider the material you are going to mark. If a light


marking is to be made on a dark workpiece, you must firstly invert
the bitmap. For many graphic programs, this function means to
create a negative.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example bitmap

5-77

Bitmap original and inverted

6.1

Fig. 5-94

Importing bitmap

Note
The CAD enables you to import graphic files in the following
formats: BMP (Windows bitmap format), TIFF (Tagged Image File
format), JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group format) and PCX
(Zsoft bitmap format).
In the example, a bitmap is used.
To import a bitmap, click on the "Bitmap" icon next to it.
The "Open" dialog window will open.

Dialog window "Open"

5-78

Fig. 5-95

Select the file which you want to import from the dialog window
"Open".

Example bitmap

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Import properties

Select the size and, if desired, the angle for the bitmap.
A black border with which you can position the bitmap on to the
marking field appears.

Current processing status

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Fig. 5-96

Example bitmap

Fig. 5-97

5-79

Select the resolution with which the bitmap is to be imported.

Resolution

Fig. 5-98

Note
The imported file is always scaled to gray.

5-80

Example bitmap

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

6.2

Setting laser parameter

When marking with a bitmap, every pixel of the graphics is marked


by one or more laser impulses.
Due to the resolution, the speed is determined by the frequency.
The higher the frequency, the shorter the marking time is. In
principle, each gray-scaled pixel is marked and each pixel
corresponds at least to one laser impulse. Should a laser impulse
per pixel not suffice, the parameter "Number of pulses per dot" is
raised to two or more in the laser parameter configuration
Note
By increasing the pulses defined per dot, you increase the length
of time the marking procedure takes.
The optimal marking contrast is achieved by adjusting the pulse
frequency, laser power and defocusing.

Administrating laser parameters

Fig. 5-99

Note
Observe that the first pulse does not lead to a visible marking
result for certain materials. In this case, set the parameter "Number
of pulse per dot" to 2 or higher.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Example bitmap

5-81

7.

Import external file formats

In TruTops Mark, the following CAD and bitmap formats can be


read in: HPGL, IGES, DXF, DWG and PCR.

7.1

Import PCR files

If you have previously created your programs with WinMark, these


can be imported into TruTops Mark without loss of information.
Open a new project in the "File" menu (menu item "New"). Then
open the "Edit" menu and select "Import PCR file". The "Open"
dialog appears. Here you select the imported file and confirm the
selection with "OK".

"Edit" menu

5-82

Import external file formats

Fig. 5-100

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

"Open" dialog window

Fig. 5-101

The PCR file with the laser parameters is imported. Save the
project as a VLF file.

"Save As" dialog window

7.2

Fig. 5-102

Import CAD files

If you have a file created in an external CAD program which you


wish to import, you can proceed as described in Section 7.1 Import
PCR files. The CAD can import CAD files with the formats HPGL,
IGES, DXF and DWG.
Note
Ensure that you assign laser parameters to the imported CAD files.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Import external file formats

5-83

8.

Determining laser parameters

There are different methods to determine laser parameters. Each


material responds differently to laser marking. For plastic, the
parameters should be selected with care. To give you assistance,
there are TruTops Mark test programs included in the directory
"C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles".
In Sections 8.1 and 8.2 you will learn how to use the test programs
and to interpret the results.

8.1

Structure of the test


programs

Determining laser parameters for


plastic

1 Laser Typ

4 Line spacing

2 Wave length

5 Marking speed (velocity)

3 Frequency
Test program (example)

Fig. 5-103

All test programs for plastic are structured as shown in Fig. 5-103.
The individual fields are assigned different parameters.

5-84

Determining laser parameters

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Loading a test programm In the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles\plastic", you can


find all the test programs for plastic.
Example: vmc5_f100_plastic.vlf
Note
The marking programs have the following naming conventions:
Value

Description

vmc?

Stands for the laser type. (VMc1, VMc2, VMc3, VMc4,


etc.)

f???

Describes the optical system and, in this way, also


determines the size of the marking field. (f100, f160, f163,
f254, etc)

plastic

Stands for the marking of plastic workpieces.

*.vlf

vlf is the file type of the marking program.


Tab. 5-4

Certain test programs have the upgrade "lowfreq". With these test
programs, you can create markings with frequencies of 2 to
32 kHz.

Loading a test program

Fig. 5-104

Select the appropriate program for your laser and your


installed optical system.

Ensure that the working distance is correct.

Mark the workpiece.

The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the
marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Determining laser parameters

5-85

8.2

Determining laser parameters for


annealing metals

This section describes how you find the annealing parameters for
your metal workpiece. In the annealing process, the top layer of the
metal is heated to such an extent as to produce a black scratchresistant marking.
Structure of the test
programs

1 PW  Pulse width

3 v  Speed

2 Defocusing

4 Frequency

Test program annealing

Fig. 5-105

All test programs for metals are structured as shown in Fig. 5-105.
The individual fields have different parameters.

5-86

Determining laser parameters

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Loading a test program In the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles\metal", you can


find all test programs for annealed markings using the laser
marking systems.
Example: vmc1_annealing_f163.vlf
Note
The marking programs have the following naming conventions:
Value

Description

vmc?

Stands for the laser type. (VMc1, VMc3, VMc5)

anealling

"Annealing" stands for annealing program.

f???

Describes the lens and thus also determines the size of


the marking field. (f100, f160, f163, f254, etc)

*.vlf

vlf is the file type of the marking program.


Tab. 5-5

The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the
marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Determining laser parameters

5-87

8.3

Determining laser parameters for


engraving metals

This section describes how you find the engraving parameters for
your metal workpiece. When engraving, several layers on the
metal are cut away one after the other. This produces an easily
read engraving.
Structure of the test
programs

1 Wave length (nm)

4 Number of parallel lines

2 Laser power (%)

5 Frequency in (kHz)

3 Pulse width (s)

6 Spedd (mm/s)
Fig. 5-106

All test programs for engraving of metals are structured as shown


in Fig. 5-106.

5-88

Determining laser parameters

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

the
directory
"C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC
Testfiles\
Loading a test program In
metal_engraving", you will find all test programs for engraved
markings using the laser marking systems.
Example: 1064_4parallel_lines_f10-35_pw5_f163.vlf
Note
The marking programs have the following naming conventions:
Value

Description

1064

Wave length of the laser marking system

4paralell_lines

4 parallel lines (width)

F10-35

Frequency in kHz

pw5

Pulse width in s

f???

Describes the lens and thus also determines the size of


the marking field. (f100, f160, f163, f254, etc)

*.vlf

vlf is the file type of the marking program.


Tab. 5-6

The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the
marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Determining laser parameters

5-89

5-90

Determining laser parameters

SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010

Chapter 6

Sequential programs

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Automatic marking ........................................................ 6-3


Start sequential program ................................................. 6-4
Loading a sequential program ......................................... 6-6
Change sequential program ............................................ 6-7
Create a new sequential program ................................... 6-8
Accept values .................................................................. 6-9
Save sequential program............................................... 6-10
Exit editor ....................................................................... 6-12
Context menu ................................................................ 6-13
Setup.............................................................................. 6-14

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Commands in the editor menu................................... 6-17


General commands ....................................................... 6-18
> Axis commands .......................................................... 6-20
> Axis commands inching operation......................... 6-22
> Mark commands ......................................................... 6-23
> System commands ..................................................... 6-26

3.

Examples for sequential programs............................ 6-31

Automatic marking

6-1

6-2

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

1.

Automatic marking

This section contains information on:

How to create a sequential program

Which commands are available to this purpose

How simple sequential programs can be structured

A sequential program serves to control automatic, reproducible


marking of workpieces.
Several marking programs, different axis positions and marking
and operating commands can be combined in the sequential
programs.
A sequential program can have as many lines as required.
When you start processing, the sequential program is worked
through line by line.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

6-3

1.1

Start sequential program

The sequential program editor is a tool enabling the easy


generation of sequential programs. Sequential programs are
required to automate sequences.

Click the "F7 Sequential program" button or press the <F7>


function key.
The following window then opens:

Sequential programs

Fig. 6-1

The boxes in the display window of the sequential program show


the status of the following parameters:
Display boxes:
In the "Finished parts" box, the actual counter is shown.
The actual counter can be changed using the "IncCounter"
command or the commands in the context menu (click on right
mouse button).
The "Status" box shows the status of the sequential program. The
sequential program last used is shown in the "File" box. The length
of an entire cycle is shown in the "Process time" box. The line in
which the sequential program is located while it is being carried out
is shown in the "Line number" box.

6-4

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

The large, top right box shows the code of the loaded sequential
program.
Edit boxes:
The box "Still to be marked" shows the value of the set counter.
This is changed using the commands "SetCounter" and
"InCounter" or by editing.
The file names of the sequential program to be started next can be
entered in the "Preselection" box.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

6-5

1.2

Loading a sequential program

The sequential programs last used are shown in gray. If you would
like to load another program, then click on the button "F5 Open file"
or press the function key <F5>.

Loading a sequential program

Fig. 6-2

Select the required program by double clicking. The program


appears in the display box.

Note
Sequential programs are saved with the filename extension *.wst.

6-6

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

1.3

Change sequential program

The sequential program editor is a support tool for creating/editing


sequential programs.

Click the "F6 Open editor" button or press the <F6> function
key.
The program window is then enlarged and has a white
background.

Editing window

Fig. 6-3

When you have carried out the changes, click on the button "F6
Exit editor" or press the function key <F6>. If you have not yet
saved the changes, the following message appears:

Message: "Save changes?"

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

Fig. 6-4

6-7

1.4

Note

Create a new sequential program

In the context menu click the item "New".


An empty editing field then appears. Now the commands of the
new sequential program must be entered. The commands can
also be taken from the context menu (Refer to Chapter 2).

Commands are written into the first empty line, irrespective of the
position of the cursor.
The following editing functions are possible which are also familiar
from other programs.

6-8

<Home>:

Jump to the beginning of the line

<End>:

Jump to the end of the line

<Delete>: Delete marked text

<Ctrl> + <C>: Copy the marked text to the clipboard

<Ctrl> + <X>: Cut marked text

<Ctrl> + <V>: Paste text from clipboard

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

1.5
> 8 Accept values

Accept values

In the context menu click the item "8 Accept values".

Fig. 6-5

The actual values given in the axis position section are taken
by the sequential program.
The currently loaded marking program is also taken into the
sequential program.

Accept values into the sequential program

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

Fig. 6-6

6-9

1.6
> 4 Save as

Save sequential program

If you wish to the save a sequential program under a new name


and path:

In the context menu click the item "4 Save as".

Fig. 6-7

The dialog field "4 Save as" appears on the screen.

"Save as" dialog window

6-10

Enter the file name and the path.

Click "3 Save".

Automatic marking

Fig. 6-8

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

> 3 Save

If you wish to save a sequential program under the same name


and path:

In the context menu, click on the menu item "3 Save".

Fig. 6-9

The sequential program is saved in the same path. The old


content of the sequential program is overwritten.
Tip
TRUMPF recommends that you save your sequential programs
*.wst and marking files *.vlf regularly on two data carriers that are
independent of one another.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

6-11

1.7
> 12 Exit editor

Exit editor

The editor mode must be closed when a sequential program has


been edited and saved.
In the context menu click the item "12 Exit editor".
or
Press the function key <F6>
or

Click on the button "F6 Exit"

Message

The editor mode is then closed.

If the sequential program has not yet been saved, a message appears on the screen.

Message: "Save changes?"

Fig. 6-10

If you want to save the sequential program:


Click the "Yes" button.
If you want to close the program without saving:

Click the "No" button.

Note
If a sequential program is started and the editor mode is not yet
finished, the same message appears on the screen.

6-12

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

1.8

Context menu

The context menu in the sequential program mode makes it easy


to call up many functions.

Context menu

Fig. 6-11

> 3 Reference

When referencing, the corresponding axis moves to the reference


point. At the same time, ensure that the reference point for the Z
axis is not the zero point but the largest possible distance to the
working area. Referencing can be done for each axis individually or
for all active axes together.

> 5 Part Counter on/off

The part counter "Still to be marked:" is switched on or off. Using


the counter, you can preset the parts to be produced. When you
set this counter to zero, the processing of the sequential program
stops. You can restart the program only when the counter is set to
a value that is not zero.

> 6 Set actual value counter


to zero

You can set the actual counter of the parts to zero. The counter is
always increased by the number that has been defined with the
command "IncCounter".

> 7 Set actuel value counter

You can set the actual counter to a specific value. This allows you
to interrupt the production. Before continuing production, set the
counter to the appropriate value so that you maintain the number
of produced parts.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

6-13

> 11 Change workpiece file

Load the new sequential program into the display window by


means of the selection box.

> 12 History

You can load the five last loaded sequential programs back into the
editor window.

> 13 Open editor

The display window for the sequential program is switched over


into the editing mode. The window is enlarged and has a white
background.

> 14 Setup

The set up menu for the workstation is shown.

1.9

Setup

Setup

Fig. 6-12

The menu items listed below are only shown when they can be
used in the sequence or marking modes.

6-14

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Select "Preselection
workpiece program
activated"

Select "Logging activated"

Select "Shutter open"


Select "Laser on"

In the sequence mode, an input box is shown. In this box, you can
enter the name of the next sequence program. This file is the next
file to be loaded and carried out in the sequence program. The
"Path" function shows where the sequential program is loaded
from.
When "Logging activated" is selected, the command "Protocol" is
activated in the sequence program. Using this command, every
variable of a VLF file can be logged in a text file. The time, date,
processing time and the name of the sequential program can be
added to each line of the log. In "File", the name and path of the
log file are given.
The shutter is opened when the workstation is started up.
The laser is switched on when the workstation is started up.

Select "Reference axis"

The axes are automatically referenced when the workstation is


started up.

Select "Use start button"

The start button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.

Select "Use stop button"

The stop button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.

Select "Mark without axis


positioning"
Select "Starting automatically
after closing door"

In the marking mode, the laser automatically moves to the entered


positions when marking is started. With this option, this behavior
can be switched off.
The workstation starts automatically when the door is closed.

Select "Approaching loading


position after end of
marking"

After marking has been completed, the laser moves forwards on


the Y axis to the door.

Select "Take the axis position


by X/Y or Z segmentation"

If you select a segmented file, segmentation starts at the current


position of the workstation.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Automatic marking

6-15

Select "Rotating the A axis to


0 degrees"

If two axes of rotation are used on a rotary table, then the inner
axis is rotated back to 0 degrees after marking.

Select "A axis on/ A axis off"

Switching the A axis on and off. The axis is removed from the
menu and cannot be used.

Select "Positioning the A, C,


X, Y and Z axes"

When quitting the workstation, the positions of the active axes are
saved. If the machine is restarted and the menu item "Reference
the axes" is selected, the laser automatically moves to the axis
positions last saved.

Option Door positions

Button Ok
Button Cancel

6-16

With this option, the door position can be changed when opening
the door. In door position 1, the door is open to its maximum.
The inputs are applied.
The inputs are not applied.

Automatic marking

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

2.

Commands in the editor menu

In the edit mode a sequential program can be generated or an


existing one can be edited. Per line only one command with the
corresponding parameter is allowed. The command is written in
bold letters. If the first word in a line is not written in bold the
command cannot be interpreted.
Add comments

You can add comments into the sequential program. Thereto a


semicolon must stand at the beginning of each comment line.
These lines are shown in green color and only serve for
information purposes.

Add parameters

A question mark ahead of the command requires the user to enter


the parameters of the corresponding command. The sequential
program will only continue after entering of the parameters.
The "IF-THEN" instructions, the "Message" command and all
commands entered without parameters are excluded from this
function.
Note
An example with the ? function is described in Chapter 3
"Examples for sequential programs".
Each command can be either entered via the keyboard or the
corresponding context menu.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-17

2.1

General commands

General commands

Context menu

> 1 New

Closes the sequential program currently loaded and makes an


empty editing box available for the new sequential program. When
modifications are being carried out on the loaded program, a query
prompt appears for saving the file.

> 2 Open

Dialog box displays for opening a sequential program.

> 3 Save

Saves the file under the same name.

> 4 Save as

6-18

Fig. 6-13

Saves the file under a new name.

> 5 Cut

The marked part in the editing window is cut out and placed in the
buffer storage. The Windows shortcut key for cutting <Ctrl + x> can
be used.

> 6 Insert

The contents of the buffer storage is pasted in at the cursor


position onwards; or when a part in the editor is marked, it will be
replaced. The Windows shortcut key for pasting <Ctrl + v> can be
used.

> 7 Copy

The marked part in the editor is copied into the buffer storage. The
Windows shortcut key for copying <Ctrl + c> can be used.

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

> 8 Accept values

Using this command, the current actual positions of the active axes
and the loaded marking file are added into the sequential program.

> 12 Exit editor

The editor will close and the sequential program will be switched to
the display mode. In case the sequential program was not saved, a
message will appear on the screen.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-19

2.2

> Axis commands

> 9 Axis commands

Context menu axis commands

Fig. 6-14

Here you can depose the commands "Drive absolute", "Drive


relative", "Focus position" or "Referencing", of the active axes.
Only the axes which are also installed are displayed. The
commands listed below for the axes only function if the axes are
also available.

AA: x

The axis of rotation (A axis) moves to position x.

DA: x

The outer axis of rotation (D axis) moves to position x.

CA: x

The rotary table (C axis) rotates to position x. In doing this, only A


or B can stand for x.

XA: x

The X axis moves to position x.

YA: x

The Y axis moves to position x. This axis is not active with Piller
control.

ZA: x

he Z axis moves to position x.

DriveTwoAxisA: w, x, y, z

6-20

Moves to the position defined under x and y with two axes


simultaneously. Parameter w stands for the designation of the C or
X axis, whereas parameter x stands for the position of the axis
defined under w. Parameter y stands for the designation of the A,
Y or Z axis, whereas parameter z stands for the position of the axis
defined under y.

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

AR: x

The value x determines how far the axis of rotation (A axis) moves.

DR: x

On the rotary table, the value x determines how far the outer axis
of rotation (D axis) moves.

CR: x

The value x determines how far the rotary table (C axis) moves.
This command cannot be used with Piller control.

XR: x

The value x determines how far the X axis moves.

YR: x

The value x determines how far the Y axis moves. This command
cannot be used with Piller control.

ZR: x

The value x determines how far the Z axis moves.

DriveTwoAxisR: w, x, y, z

Ref: x
RefTwoAxis: x, y

Moves with two axes simultaneously as determined by the value


specified under x and y. Parameter w stands for the designation of
the C or X axis, whereas parameter x stands for the position of the
axis defined under w. Parameter y stands for the designation of the
A, Y or Z axis, whereas parameter z stands for the position of the
axis defined under y.
A reference run is carried out using the X axis.
References two axes simultaneously. The parameter stands for the
designation of the C or X axis, whereas parameter y stands for the
designation of the A, Y or Z axis.
To operate the focus position there are two specifications:

Focus finder with light barrier system

Focus finder with LAP system


The focus position is set according to specification. With the light
barrier system, DriveFocus is used directly.

DriveFocus: x

Travels at high speed to the position specified under x. Then at low


speed to the focus position (focus finder).
Note
The "DriveFocus: x" command is not supported by every system.
Contact the TRUMPF branch in your country if you have any
questions.

ReadFocusPos

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

When the LAP system is used, select "3 Focus position > Read"
and save. Then change to DriveFocus to find the focus position.

Commands in the editor menu

6-21

> Axis commands inching operation

Fig. 6-15

Here the commands "Start driving" and " Stop driving" can be used
to move an activated axis in the inching operation (in (+) or (-)
direction).

6-22

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

2.3

> Mark commands

> 10 Mark commands

Context menu mark commands

> 1 ActivedRTCList: x

> 2 Convert: x

Fig. 6-16

Activates the corresponding marking list in the retrigger mode.


Parameter x can take the values 1 and 2. Marking can only be
activated by means of the restart input on the digital interface.
This command converts a loaded file (also refer to Preload).

> 3 DeleteVct: x

This command deletes all VCT files or the currently loaded VCT
files. Parameter x can take the value "Actual" or "All".

> 4 Mark: x

If a marking file with complete path and name is inserted after the
command, this file will be loaded and executed. If the command is
inserted without marking file, the actually loaded file will be
executed.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-23

> 5 Pilot: x, y

This order switches the pilot laser on or off. The parameter x can
accept the values "Contour," "Rectangle," and "Off." In "Contour"
mode the pilot laser travels along the "outline" of the marking. In
"Rectangle" mode the pilot laser moves around the marking with a
rectangle contour. The pilot laser is switched off with the "Off"
parameter. The parameter y can accept the values "Once" or
"Endless". "Once" allows the pilot laser to travel once along the
rectangle or contour. "Endless", on the other hand, has the pilot
laser mark endlessly until the next command is executed.

> 6 Preload: x

After this command stays the marking file with name and path. This
file will be loaded into the memory and converted if necessary. This
command is not self-locking, e.g. the program immediately runs to
next line and continues to work-off the program. So simultaneously
to a conversion you can move the axis.

> 6 Preload: x, y

Should the laser be operated in the retrigger mode, the required list
number y, in addition to the marking file x, must also be given to
the preload command.
Note
A list (1 or 2) with the ActivadetRTCL command must be activated
after loading the marking file. You can find out how to activate
retrigger mode in Chapter 2, Section 8.3 "Tools menu" > "Setup" >
"Digital interface".

> 7 Segment: x

Before you can work with this command, the segment must be
loaded in a file. Then you can select any segment from this file. "x"
stands for the segment number.

> 8 ShiftA: w, x, y, z

With this command a marking file can be scaled, rotated and


moved. The parameter "w" stands for scaling factor, "x" for rotation
angle, "y" for X-offset and "z" for Y-offset. This command affects
the loaded marking file absolutely.

> 9 ShiftR: w, x, y, z

With this command a marking file can be scaled, rotated and


moved. The parameter "w" stands for scaling factor, "x" for rotation
angle, "y" for X-offset and "z" for Y-offset. This command affects
the loaded marking file relatively.

> 10 Var: x, y, z

Inserts the variable "x" into the actually loaded marking file. This
marking file must contain the variable "x", thereby the value "y" will
be allocated to the variable "x".
This command can be used with two or three parameters. If three
parameters are used, the variable value will be read out from a file.
Thereby for "y" a text-file with path and name and for the value "z"
the line with the variable content are indicated. The marking
program (CAD file) must contain the respective variable with the
"external source" data origin.

6-24

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Each variable is written on a separate line of the text file. The


name and the value of the variables are on the same line. The two
values are only separated by a comma.
Note
If the Var command is called up by means of a ? function, the user
can use 2 or 3 parameters. All three parameters are available in
the dialog window, but only x and y have to be set.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-25

2.4

> System commands

> 11 System commands

Context menu system commands

System commands
> 4 CopyData: old, new

6-26

Fig. 6-17

Group file access


Copies the file from "old" into the file "new". The indication of the
file names must contain the complete path. If the file with the name
"new" already exists, it will be overwritten without warning!

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

> 6 Delete: x

The file "x" will be deleted. The complete path and name must be
indicated.

> 21 NewName: old, new

The file with the name "old" is renamed as the file "new". When
entering the file name, the complete path must be included. If a file
exists with the name "new", it will be overwritten without warning!
Example:
CopyData:C:\TruMark\Wst\Test.TXT,C:\TruMark\Wst\UFO.TXT
NewName:C:\TruMark\Wst\UFO.TXT,C:\TruMark\Wst\OLD.TXT
Delete:C:\TruMark\Wst\OLD.TXT

Note
No spaces are allowed between the parameters!
> 7 EditFileStr: File1, Line, Reads the respective line out of "File1" and displays it in an input
File2, Line box. The text of the input box is saved to the respective line
("Line2") of "File2" if this input box is confirmed with OK.
System commands

Protocol / Loop / Counter / Message / Wait / Label

> 25 Protocol: v1, v2

With this command each variable of the marking program can be


recorded in a text-file. The variables to be recorded are listed after
the command and separated by a comma. This command is only
available after checking off the check-box in the menu
"Configuration/Workstation".

> 19 Loop: x, y

Loop start with "x" repetitions, whereby for "x" also the tilde (~) for
endless may be used. The loop will be terminated after "x" loops. If
endless is selected the processing has to be stopped manually.
This command can also be used with two parameters. In this case
the number of loops will read from a file. Thereby for "x" the
complete path and file name must be indicated and for "y" the line
with the number of loops.
Each line only contains the number of loops. Loops may not be
interlaced and must be closed with the EndLoop command.

> 8 EndLoop

Indicates the loop end. All instructions between Loop: and


EndLoop will be repeated so many times until the loop counter
reads zero. Then the loop will be quitted and the program
continues with the next command after EndLoop.

> 14 IncCounter: x

The actual number counter will be increased by the value "x". The
set value counter will be reduced accordingly. If no figure is given
automatically the value "one" is being set. In the case of more than
one marking, a value greater than "one" can be useful. The actual
counter can be changed by the operator also by using commands
from the context menu (by clicking on the right mouse button).

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-27

> 28 SetCounter: x
> 27 Request: x
> 29 SetFinishedParts:

Sets the set counter to the value "x".


Confirm or cancel a request.
Determines the value "x" for the parts to be processed.

> 20 Message: Text

Text outputs are shown in a message box. The message window


must first be closed before the program can continue to run. After
the character string "\n\r" in a text string the following text will be
written in a new line.

> 31 Wait: x

The system waits the number "x" milliseconds, until the sequential
program will be continued.

> 32 $Label$

Label = jump labels are marked with the symbol $ at the beginning
and end of the word.

Anything entered following a semicolon is interpreted as


comments.

System commands

> 9 If Counter=x Then

> 10 If FileExists=x Then


> 11 If FileNotExists=x Then

If ( condition ) Then ( action )

This condition is true when the parts counter reaches the number
x.
This condition is true if the specified file x does exist.
This condition is true if the specified file x does not exist.

> 12 If InputHigh:x Then

This condition becomes true when, for example, the corresponding


input has the status "high = 24 V".

> 13 If InputLow:x Then

This condition becomes true when, for example, the corresponding


input has the status "low = 0 V".
Note
If the condition is true, then the task that comes after the Then is
carried out. For If (condition) Then (action) commands, the
following three actions are possible:

> 1 Break

> 2 Stop
> 3 $Label$

6-28

The loop will be quitted and the program continues with the next
command after the loop.
The program stops the execution of the script.
Label = jump labels are marked with the symbol $ at the beginning
and end of the word. The label must be after the IF-THEN
instruction.

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

System commands

Laser / Electronics / Mechanics

> 17 LaserOff

Switching off the laser.

> 18 LaserOn

Switching on the laser.

> 1 Button

Is waiting until the start button is being pressed. The start button is
only active when the pilot light shines.

> 15 InputHigh: x

Wait until the input "x" of the slot "X20" on the interface circuit
board has been set. Observe the specifications in the interface
description.

> 16 InputLow: x

Wait until the input "x" of the slot "X20" on the interface circuit
board has been reset. Observe the specifications in the interface
description.

> 23 OutputOff: x

Output "x" of laser marking system slot "X20" will be switched off.
Observe manual!

> 24 OutputOn: x

Output "x" of laser marking system slot "X20" will be switched on.
Observe manual!
Note
If the output had not been reset during the sequential program it
will remain active even after ending the program.

> 5 CloseDoor

> 22 OpenDoor

Closes the door of the workstation. This command only makes


sense if no C axis has been defined.
Opens the door of the workstation.

> 26 QuickFlow: Gip-File

With this command you can communicate from the sequential


program to the program "QuickFlow". Thereby "QuickFlow" will be
started with the Gip-File. The Gip-File will be processed and
afterwards closed.

> 30 TurnTable: x

Rotates the C axis from station A to station B and vice-versa. As


parameter A or B must be entered.
Note
This command is only available if a rotary indexing table is
existent.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Commands in the editor menu

6-29

System commands

CallExe/CallExeAndWait

> 2 CallExe: Exe, File

Starts the program specified under "Exe" and goes to the next line
of the sequential program. A possible file, which loads the external
program, is entered under "File". This command can also be used
with the "Exe" attribute.

> 3 CallExeAndWait: Exe, File

Starts the program specified under "Exe" and waits until it is over.
The next command of the sequential program is then executed. A
possible file, which loads the external program, is entered under
"File". This command can also be used with the "Exe" attribute.
Example:
CallExeAndWait:C:\Windows\Notepad.exe,C:\TruMark\VLF\List.txt

6-30

Commands in the editor menu

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

3.

Examples for sequential programs

In the directory C:\TRUMARK\WST\.... there are different examples


of sequential programs.
Variant
TruMark Station 5000

Sequential program in the edit mode, variant TruMark


Station 5000

Fig. 6-18

The following commands are used to generate this sequential


program:

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

SetCounter:8000. The part counter will be set to 8000.

ZA:120: The Z axis move to the absolute position 120 mm.

XA:60: The X axis moves to the absolute position of 60 mm

Mark:C:\TruMark\VLFS\NR1.VLF: is marking the named file.

XR:50: The X axis moves on further by +50 mm.

Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\SNR.VLF: the same file will be marked


again but shifted by 50 mm.

Examples for sequential programs

6-31

Variant
TruMark Station 5000 (R)

Sequential program in the edit mode, variant TruMark Station


5000 (R)

Fig. 6-19

For establishing this sequential program the following commands


have been used:

6-32

SetCounter:10000: The part counter will be set to 10000.

ZA:120: the Z axis move to the absolute position 120 mm.

TurnTable:A: the rotary indexing table turns to station A.

Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\r_50_50_kreis2.VLF: is marking the


named file.

ZA:125: the Z axis move to the absolute position 125 mm.

TurnTable:B: the rotary indexing table turns to station B.

Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\ r_50_50_kreis2.VLF: is marking the


named file.

Examples for sequential programs

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

? function variant

Sequential program in editing mode, ? function variant

Fig. 6-20

The following commands are used to create this sequential


program:

XA:65: the X axis travels to the absolute position of 65 mm.

ZA:109: the Z axis travels to the absolute position of 100 mm.

Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\Var.VLF
marks the entered file

?Var:Var2,C:\TRUMARK\WST\Var.txt,:
The Var command is assigned the "Var2" variable. "Var2" is
available as variable in the "Var.VLF" marking program. (data
origin: external source).
The variables are saved in the file "C:\TRUMARK\WST
\Var.txt". The last entry, the line number, is missing and is
requested by the ? function of the user.

Parameter input for "Var" command

Fig. 6-21

Note
All parameters of the Var command specified in the sequential
program also appear in the dialog window. If no parameters are
entered, insert all parameters manually in the dialog window.

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Examples for sequential programs

6-33

6-34

Examples for sequential programs

SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010

Chapter 7

Installing TruTops Mark

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

1.
1.1
1.2

Introduction.................................................................... 7-3
System requirements....................................................... 7-3
Contents of the data medium .......................................... 7-3

2.

Installation...................................................................... 7-4

Introduction

7-1

7-2

Introduction

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

1.

Introduction

This data medium is not a fully-automatic setup medium, but a


medium which permits semi-automatic installation of TruTops
Mark, e.g. on a(n)
office PC
laser marking system
laser unit
If you set the simulation mode on the office PC, you can create
drawings for the marking by means of the CAD.

1.1

Operating system Windows XP Professional

The installation requires administrator rights

1.2

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

System requirements

Contents of the data medium

TruTops Mark_x_x.exe

Introduction

=> as self-extracting file

7-3

2.

Installation

1. Place the data medium in the drive.


The following dialog is opened with Autostart. If not, start the
data medium from the Explorer in Windows.

Installer language

Fig. 7-1

2. Select the requested language and confirm with "OK".

Installer components

Fig. 7-2

3. Check the components you want to install and uncheck the


ones you don't want to install.
4. Click "Install" to start the installation.

7-4

Installation

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

Installer progress indicator

Fig. 7-3

The progress indicator informs you about the current progress


during installation.
Click "Show details" to display detailed information on the
program installation.

Installer end

Fig. 7-4

5. If the installation was successful, acknowledge with "OK".

Icon TruTops Mark

Fig. 7-5

6. The icons "TruTops Mark", "CAD" and if selected for


installation
"QuickFlow" automatically appear on the
desktop.
7. The programs are started with the mouse via the respective
icon.

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

Installation

7-5

As the TruTops Mark software is installed in simulation mode, you


must switch off simulation mode after installation on a laser
marking system/laser unit and activate the RTC card.

Open the menu item "Tools" > "Configuration". Select the


"GUI" card.

TruTops Mark configuration

Fig. 7-6

Remove the checkmark on "Simulation" in the "GUI" tab,


instead activate the RTC card.

Confirm the information with "OK". TruTops Mark and the


supply unit simulator are closed.

Restart TruTops Mark via the "TruTops Mark" icon.


The start screen appears on the screen.

7-6

Installation

SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010

Index
Customer password ..................................... 2-6
Customer/operator ....................................... 2-4

Accept values .............................................. 6-9


Adjust shades of gray ................................ 2-53
Administrate hatching .............................. 4-158
Annealing..................................................... 1-8
Arc resolution........................................... 4-130
Area filling ................................................ 4-131
Assign laser parameters............................ 2-48
Automatic marking....................................... 6-3

Define marking direction ............................ 2-50


Defocusing ............................................... 4-115
Diagnostics tool.......................................... 1-12
Digital interface .......................................... 3-53
Display laser power.................................... 2-21
Display segment numbers ....................... 4-137
Dotted line................................................ 4-132
Draw......................................................... 4-220
Draw menu................................................. 4-14
DXF export............................................... 4-214

B
Backround colors..................................... 4-214
Barcode ..................................................... 4-95
Barcode type ............................................. 4-96
Beam direction........................................... 1-10
Binning....................................................... 2-31
Bitmaps.................................................... 4-218
Bleaching ..................................................... 1-8

C
CAD Editor................................................. 1-13
CAD, starting ............................................... 4-6
Calibrate laser power................................. 2-23
Change in color ........................................... 1-8
Circle drawing .............................................. 5-7
Color list management............................. 4-208
COM interface ........................................... 3-54
Commands in the editor menu .................. 6-17
Configuration > Digital interface ................ 3-41
Configuration > Directories........................ 3-40
Configuration > GUI................................... 3-38
Configuration > Machine ........................... 3-36
Configuration > Miscellaneous .................. 3-42
Configuration > Options............................. 3-43
Configuration > User management ........... 3-45
Configuration > User management
> Card User management ...................... 2-5
Control with external data communication 3-51
Create marking program.............................. 5-6
Create polyline........................................... 4-49

SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010

Index

E
Editing functions........................................... 6-8
Effective velocity ...................................... 4-130
Emergency circuit ........................................ 3-7
Engraving..................................................... 1-7
Error correction ............................................ 5-9
Error display............................................... 3-31
Error info .................................................... 3-32
Error, warning history................................. 3-18
Example graphic .......................................... 5-4
Exit editor ................................................... 6-12
Export DXF/DWG....................................... 4-48
Export project data................................... 4-108
Extras menu............................................... 3-34

F
First pulse ................................................ 4-118
Foaming ....................................................... 1-9
Focus test ................................................ 4-163
Font Editor ............................................... 4-165
Formats.................................................... 4-215
FPK marking ............................................ 4-118
FPS marking ............................................ 4-119
Frame correction........................................ 2-53

8-1

Gamma value ............................................ 2-49


Geometric figures ........................................ 5-5
Graphic, creating ......................................... 5-5
Grid and local coordinate system ............ 4-209
Grid setting .................................................. 5-6

Mark ......................................................... 4-219


Mark delay ............................................... 4-124
Mark preview.......................................3-7, 3-16
Marking ...........................................3-13, 4-162
Marking direction alternating...................... 2-51
Marking field............................................... 1-14
Marking field, optic ................................... 4-136
Marking file..........................................3-6, 3-13
Marking interface ..............................1-13, 3-11
Marking program........................................ 1-14
Marking program, loading ............................ 3-6
Marking program, running............................ 3-5
Marking program, starting .......................... 3-20
Material removal .......................................... 1-8
Matrix generator......................................... 2-28
Measurement type ................................... 4-204
Menu, draw ................................................ 4-57
Menu, edit .................................................. 4-45
Menu, view................................................. 4-50
Mode

CW..................................................... 4-119

CWM.................................................. 4-121

PULSED ............................................ 4-120


Mode 2 ....................................................... 2-52

H
Hatching as area ..................................... 4-164
HPGL file import ........................................ 4-46

I
Imager........................................................ 2-45
Import bitmap............................................. 2-46
Import file ................................................... 4-45
Import scale ............................................... 4-47
Input control ............................................... 4-52
Invert grayscale chart ................................ 2-50
IO status .................................................... 3-15

N
J

Named sections ......................................... 4-55


Navigator.........................................2-13, 4-163

Jump ........................................................ 4-217


Jump delay .............................................. 4-123
Jump velocity........................................... 4-124

O
L
Lag delay ................................................... 2-51
Las Off delay ........................................... 4-123
Las On delay ........................................... 4-123
Laser marking systems................................ 2-3
Laser menu................................................ 3-25
Laser menu.............................................. 4-105
Laser parameters ...................................... 3-17
Laser power ............................................. 4-116
Laser units ................................................... 2-3
Last view.................................................... 4-54
Load CAD file .............................................. 3-6

Object matrix............................................ 4-151


Objects..................................................... 4-226
Octagon drawing........................................ 5-12
Operation matrix generator........................ 2-32
Operator password ...................................... 2-6
Optimize grayscale chart ........................... 2-49
Option at customer..................................... 2-12
Option Navigator ........................................ 1-14
Optional settings ........................................ 2-13
Options......................................................... 2-1

P
Parallel lines............................................. 4-130

8-2

SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010

Parameter dimensioning.......................... 4-205


Paths........................................................ 4-223
Pilot laser ........................................ 2-25, 4-162
Pilot laser setup ................................ 2-26, 3-25
Pilot laser, activating.................................. 2-27
Point......................................................... 4-222
Polygon delay .......................................... 4-123
Project data.............................................. 4-161
Protection cover........................................... 3-8
Pulse........................................................ 4-117
Pulse frequency....................................... 4-117
Pulse repetition frequency ....................... 4-117

Step period............................................... 4-124


System status ............................................ 3-14

T
TCP/IP interface......................................... 3-54
Templates ................................................ 4-224
Terms ......................................................... 1-14
Text object ................................................. 4-90
TLV control commands .............................. 3-32
Track width............................................... 4-116
TrueType.................................................. 4-170
TrueType font import................................ 4-171
TXF font ................................................... 4-169

QuickFlow .................................................. 3-53

U
R
Rectangle drawing..................................... 5-10
Remove double line................................... 4-49
Reset ................................................ 3-12, 3-27

User interface CAD ...................................... 4-7


User interface CAD with Multihead............ 4-13
User levels ................................................... 2-4

V
S
Safety circuit open ....................................... 3-8
Save......................................................... 4-223
Save marking program ................................ 5-9
Save sequential program........................... 6-10
Scanning speed....................................... 4-117
Segments, sorting.................................... 4-160
Selection .................................................... 4-54
Sequence...................................... 4-130, 4-134
Sequential program ................................... 1-14
Sequential program editor ........................... 6-4
Serial interface........................................... 3-53
Show segmentation ................................. 4-136
Shutter ................................................ 3-9, 3-12
Simmer .................................................... 4-120
Simulation mode.......................................... 2-3
Start screen ................................................. 3-4
Status........................................................... 3-9
Status area ................................................ 3-14
Status bar .................................................. 4-50
Status line ................................................ 4-216

SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010

Variable list administration....................... 4-153

W
White levels................................................ 2-53
Width .............................................4-129, 4-130
Wobbling .................................................. 4-130
Workpiece .................................................... 3-8
Workstation marking program.................... 3-52

Z
Z offset ..................................................... 4-116

8-3

8-4

SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010